Top Banner
PC300 MD300 AT Command Manual The AT Command Manual describes the AT Commands that are supported in the PC300 PC Card and MD300 Broadband USB Modem.
272
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300

MD300

AT Command Manual

The AT Command Manual describes the

AT Commands that are supported in the

PC300 PC Card and MD300 Broadband USB Modem.

Page 2: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 2 of 272

The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International. The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, is strictly prohibited.

Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, the copyright holder.

First Edition (July 2007)

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to make modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual.

All rights reserved.

© Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2008

Publication number: 1202-6404 Rev. 2

Printed in United States of America

Page 3: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 3 of 272

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to AT Commands ............................................................................ 9 1.1 Related Documentation ....................................................................................... 9 1.2 Overview............................................................................................................. 9 1.3 History of Core Module AT Commands Manuals .................................................. 9 1.4 Syntax Description .............................................................................................. 9 1.5 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands...................................................... 12 1.6 GPRS Communication........................................................................................ 12 1.7 Abortability ....................................................................................................... 13

2 Call Control....................................................................................................... 15 2.1 ATA Answer Incoming Call ............................................................................... 15 2.2 ATD Dial .......................................................................................................... 15 2.3 ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service ...................................... 19 2.4 ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service................................... 20 2.5 ATH Hang up ................................................................................................... 22 2.6 ATO Return to Online Data Mode...................................................................... 22 2.7 ATP Select Pulse dialing..................................................................................... 23 2.8 ATT Select Tone Dialing .................................................................................... 23 2.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control............................................................... 23 2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call ..................................................................................... 24 2.11 AT+CLCC List Current Calls............................................................................... 24

3 Control and Status ............................................................................................ 27 3.1 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control........................................................................ 27 3.2 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character ..................................................................... 27 3.3 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character..................................................... 28 3.4 ATS4 Response Formatting Character............................................................... 28 3.5 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) ........................................ 29 3.6 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control........................................................................... 30 3.7 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout ............................................................. 30 3.8 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control .......................................................... 31 3.9 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control....................................................... 31 3.10 AT+CEER Extended Error Report........................................................................ 32 3.11 AT+CIND Indicator Control ............................................................................... 32 3.12 AT* List all Supported AT Commands ................................................................ 35 3.13 AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands ........................................................ 35 3.14 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error..................................................................... 36 3.15 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)..................................................... 36

Page 4: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 4 of 272

3.16 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting.................................................... 39 3.17 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) .......................................... 41 3.18 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status ......................................................................... 42 3.19 AT+CPWD Change Password ............................................................................. 43 3.20 AT+CR Service Reporting Control ...................................................................... 44 3.21 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code............................................................................ 46 3.22 AT+CSQ Signal Strength.................................................................................... 47 3.23 AT*ECAM Call Monitoring.................................................................................. 48

4 Operational Control and Status.......................................................................... 53 4.1 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality ..................................................................... 53 4.2 AT*E2RESET Restart Module ............................................................................. 54 4.3 AT+CMAR Master Reset .................................................................................... 54

5 Profiles ............................................................................................................. 56 5.1 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile ............................................ 56 5.2 AT&W Store Configuration Profile ...................................................................... 63 5.3 ATZ Restore Configuration Profile .................................................................... 63

6 Time Commands............................................................................................... 65 6.1 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date ............................................................................ 65

7 Data - CSD........................................................................................................ 66 7.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type................................................................. 66 7.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol ........................................................................... 67

8 Data - GPRS ...................................................................................................... 70 8.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................................... 70 8.2 AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify................................................................... 71 8.3 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach .................................................................. 71 8.4 AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class........................................................... 72 8.5 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State........................................................................... 73 8.6 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context................................................................... 74 8.7 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context ................................................ 77 8.8 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting.................................................................... 79 8.9 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address..................................................................... 81 8.10 AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) .................... 82 8.11 AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) ................................... 90 8.12 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) .................................... 94 8.13 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) .......................... 99 8.14 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) ......................................... 100

Page 5: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 5 of 272

8.15 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status................................................ 101 8.16 AT+CGTFT Traffic Flow Template .................................................................. 104 8.17 AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control ......................................................... 108 8.18 AT*EUPLINK Send Uplink Data ........................................................................ 109

9 Internet Accounts............................................................................................ 111 9.1 AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters 111 9.2 AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters112 9.3 AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create ................................................................. 114 9.4 AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities ..... 115 9.5 AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities .... 117 9.6 AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete ........................................... 118 9.7 AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP ...... 119 9.8 AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP ..... 122 9.9 AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters...... 125 9.10 AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters..... 126 9.11 AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP .... 127 9.12 AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP ... 129 9.13 AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters ........ 131 9.14 AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters ......... 133 9.15 AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General Parameters............... 135 9.16 AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters.............. 136 9.17 AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters137 9.18 AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters139 9.19 AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table

Parameters...................................................................................................... 140

10 Identification................................................................................................... 143 10.1 AT Attention Command.................................................................................. 143 10.2 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification................................................ 143 10.3 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification ......................................................... 143 10.4 AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification............................................................ 144 10.5 AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification....................................... 144 10.6 AT+GCAP Capabilities .................................................................................... 145 10.7 AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification.................................................. 145 10.8 AT+GMM Request Model Identification........................................................... 146 10.9 AT+GMR Revision Identification ..................................................................... 146 10.10 ATI Identification Information......................................................................... 147

11 Serial Interface ................................................................................................ 150

Page 6: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 6 of 272

11.1 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ..................................................................... 150 11.2 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response .................................................................. 150 11.3 ATV DCE Response Format ............................................................................. 151 11.4 AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format ................................................... 152 11.5 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control ............................................................... 153 11.6 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate............................................................. 154 11.7 ATE Command Echo ....................................................................................... 155 11.8 ATQ Result Code Suppression ........................................................................ 156

12 Network .......................................................................................................... 157 12.1 AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode ..................................................... 157 12.2 AT*ERINFO Network Capability ....................................................................... 164 12.3 AT+CLCK Facility Lock ................................................................................... 165 12.4 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ...................................................................... 168 12.5 AT+COPN Read Operator Names ................................................................... 170 12.6 AT+COPS Operator Selection.......................................................................... 171 12.7 AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List ................................................................... 173 12.8 AT+CREG Network Registration...................................................................... 175

13 Phonebook...................................................................................................... 178 13.1 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read............................................................................. 178 13.2 AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select .............................................................. 180 13.3 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write............................................................................ 181

14 Short Message Services - Point to Point ........................................................... 184 14.1 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages............................................ 184 14.2 AT+CMGF Message Format ............................................................................ 184 14.3 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory ............................................................. 185 14.4 AT+CMGC Send Command............................................................................. 186 14.5 AT+CMGS Send Message................................................................................ 188 14.6 AT+CMSS Send From Storage ......................................................................... 189 14.7 AT+CMGD Delete Message............................................................................. 190 14.8 AT+CMGL List Message.................................................................................. 191 14.9 AT+CMGR Read Message ............................................................................... 193 14.10 AT +CMMS More Messages to Send................................................................. 195 14.11 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE....................................................... 195 14.12 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage ............................................................. 201 14.13 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address................................................................... 203 14.14 AT+CSCS Select Character Set ........................................................................ 204 14.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters .............................................................. 205

Page 7: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 7 of 272

14.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service ................................................................... 206 14.17 AT*E2CMGA Modify message attribute ........................................................... 207 14.18 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings........................................................................ 208 14.19 AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings ............................................................................ 209

15 Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast .......................................................... 210 15.1 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type ................................................ 210 15.2 AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication............................................................... 211

16 SIM Commands ............................................................................................... 213 16.1 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access.................................................................... 213 16.2 AT+CPIN PIN Control..................................................................................... 216 16.3 AT*EPEE Pin Event ......................................................................................... 218 16.4 AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number......................................................................... 219 16.5 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification ................................................................. 219 16.6 AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information............................................................... 220 16.7 AT+CEAP EAP Authentication ......................................................................... 221 16.8 AT+CERP EAP Retrieve Parameters.................................................................. 223 16.9 AT+CUAD UICC Application Discovery............................................................ 224

17 SIM Application Toolkit ................................................................................... 225 17.1 AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection........................................................................ 225 17.2 AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response .................................................................... 225 17.3 AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings ................................................... 228 17.4 SIM Toolkit Unsolicited Result Codes ............................................................... 229

18 Supplementary Services................................................................................... 247 18.1 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation ...................................... 247 18.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter.................................................................. 248 18.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum................................................ 249 18.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge ............................................................................ 250 18.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table.................................................... 251 18.6 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions .......................................... 252 18.7 AT+CCWA Call Waiting.................................................................................... 254 18.8 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification.................................................................. 256 18.9 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction ................................................ 259 18.10 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification .................................................. 260 18.11 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data ....................................... 263

19 Alternate Line Services .................................................................................... 268 19.1 AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile................................................................... 268

Page 8: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 8 of 272

20 Alphabetic Listing of AT Commands................................................................ 269

Page 9: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 9 of 272

1 Introduction to AT Commands This manual lists detailed information on the function of the AT Command set that can be used with the PC300 or EM400. This manual refers to the PC300 and EM400 as radio devices. If there is a difference in the functionality of the radio devices PC300 and EM400, information will be listed separately.

1.1 Related Documentation This manual is supplied with an Integrator’s Manual when you purchase a PC300 or EM400.

1.2 Overview AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to control and implement the functions of the module. Using AT commands, the following actions are possible: •Control of DCE •GPRS •Call control •Supplementary Service •SIM application tool kit •Control any embedded application in the device The manual contains a large number of Sony Ericsson-specific commands in addition to those implemented in accordance with the 3GPP and ITU-T recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the functions of the module. The Sony Ericsson-specific commands are identified by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description provided below). Only commands that are listed in the AT Commands Manual are supported unless otherwise stated. Other commands may be supported by the module but these are only included for historical or legacy reasons.

1.3 History of Core Module AT Commands Manuals The following table describes the module software version documented in each AT Command Manual version.

AT Manual Version Product Firmware Revision

PA1 R1A025

PA3 R1A039

1.4 Syntax Description This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the PC300 AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for additional information.

Page 10: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 10 of 272

1.4.1 Conventions In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT commands. <command> The name of the command that is to be entered. <parameter> The parameter values that are defined for a certain command. <CR> The command line is terminated by the Carriage Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command. <LF> Line feed character or ATS4 command. < > The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element. The brackets do not appear in the command line. [ ] Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a command or an optional part of a response. The brackets do not appear in the command line. <Value> The default values of the supported parameters are indicated by using bold text when presenting the value. •Other characters, including ‘?', parenthesis, etc., appear in commands and responses as written. •The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.3.3 AT Response Syntax and 1.4 Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each AT command. •OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.

1.4.2 AT Command Syntax The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command is made up of the following three elements: •the prefix; •the body; •the termination character. The prefix consists of the letters “AT” or "at", or , to repeat the execution of the previous command line, the characters "A/" or "a/". The body is made up of the command, the parameter, and if applicable the associated values. Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces between the individual bodies are ignored.

Basic Syntax Command The format of basic syntax commands is as follows: AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<CR> ATS0=0<CR> (sets the automatic answering) Additional commands may follow a command on the same command line without any character being required for separation. For the command D parameters, see the description for the command in question. A version of the basic syntax is:

Page 11: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 11 of 272

AT<command><parameter>

Extended Syntax Command •AT+<command>= [<parameter>] •AT*<command>=[<parameter>] AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module) If several values are included in the command, they are separated by commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values. Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the preceding extended command as a separator.

Read Command Syntax The read command is used to check the current values of parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line: •AT+<command>? •AT*<command>? •AT<command>? AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set) <CR>“IRA”<CR> (information text response) <CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)

Test Command Syntax The test command is used to test whether the command has been implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line: •AT+<command>=? •AT*<command>=? AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response parameters) <CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values) <CR>OK<CR> (final result code) If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR is issued. Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the parameter values.

1.4.3 Other Terminology In this document, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic service (voice, data, fax) within one call.

1.4.4 AT Response Syntax The default mode response shown below is in text mode. For information about the ATV DCE response, see ATV DCE Response Format. Possible formats for the result codes are: •Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has a numerical equivalent.

Page 12: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 12 of 272

•Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an asterisk (*):

•AT+<command>: <parameter > •AT*<command>: <parameter>

where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>. If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are always issued in alphabetical form. •Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by <CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by looking for a final result code response, such as OK. There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:

Final Result Code A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is completed and another command may be issued. •If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result code OK. •If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an error code. Final result codes are: Value General meaning OK Command executed, no errors ERROR Invalid command or command line too long NO DIALTONE No dialing possible, wrong mode BUSY Remote station busy NO ANSWER Connection completion time-out NO CARRIER Link not established or disconnected

Unsolicited Result Code Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly associated with a command being issued from the TE.

1.5 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands For many of the more complicated commands, examples are provided after the command’s description. Always refer to the detailed description of the command in question to check valid parameter values, AT command syntax and Response syntax.

1.6 GPRS Communication To initiate a session with the network you need to set up a ‘data account’ on the module using the AT+CGDCONT command. You need to specify the correct Access Point Name (APN) which you get from your service provider. The command below sets up the data account to access an APN called "internet."

Page 13: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 13 of 272

AT+CGDCONT=1,“IP”,“internet” After this you need to use the ATD command to make a GPRS call. The example below dials into the network using account number 1. ATD*99***1# If the module is able to connect to the APN it will return a CONNECT. At this point PPP/IP packets should be sent by the application, to negotiate an IP address. The easiest way of doing this whole thing is to create a windows dial up networking session with the dial string *99***1# after creating the data account on the module. It is not possible to initiate a GPRS session from the network at present. The reason for this is that unless a PDP context has been setup it has not been assigned an IP address by the GGSN/DHCP server and as a result it cannot be addressed other than through its ME number (defeating the object of using IP). This is specified in GSM 7.60 or 3GPP 27.060. For additional information about GPRS communication, refer to the application note, which can be obtained from the extranet or from customer support.

1.7 Abortability Commands that are able to be stopped or terminated while executing are said to be "abortable". These abortable commands may be terminated by sending a character or control sequence. As very few commands are abortable - all AT-Commands in this manual should be considered "not abortable" unless otherwise noted. This command is abortable. The following commands can be aborted: AT&W Store Configuration Profile AT*E2CMGL List Message without marking Read AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions AT+CCWA Call Waiting AT+CGACT PCP Context Activate AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach AT+CLAC List AT Commands AT+CLCK Facility Lock AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction AT+CMGC Send Command AT+CMGS Send Message AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory AT+CMSS Send Storage AT+CNUM Subscriber Number AT+COLP Connected Line Presentation AT+COPN Read Operator Names AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List

Page 14: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 14 of 272

ATA Answer Incoming Call ATD Dial

Page 15: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 15 of 272

2 Call Control

2.1 ATA Answer Incoming Call

Description Command Possible Responses

Answer an incoming call ATA CONNECT

CONNECT <text>

NO CARRIER

ERROR

OK Description: The command instructs the MS to answer immediately if an incoming call is pending. The behaviour is different depending on the type of incoming call as reflected in the table below. Note 1: If a test command (ATA=?) is issued, the response will be NO CARRIER as this will be interpreted as ATA command.

This command is abortable. Defined values: <text> Description

4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s

9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s

19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s

28800 Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s

xx (other values may appear due to functionality)

Example: RING RING ATA OK

2.2 ATD Dial Command syntax: The dial command includes a number of dial modifiers and parameters that influence both the behaviour and the result codes. As a consequence of that the description table includes a number of typical

Page 16: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 16 of 272

combinations for better understanding compared to writing the command with all parameters and dial modifiers presented as one line as in most other commands.

Description Command Possible Responses

Originate a call and dial the phone number specified in <dial_string>.

ATD<dial_string>[G or g][I or i][;]

CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE BUSY

No action commands that returns result codes immediately.

ATD[;] OK (If semicolon included) NO CARRIER (If semicolon not included)

Dial the phone number stored in memory location <mem> with index <n>. If <mem> is omitted, the memory storage is defined by the +CPBS command.

ATD>[<mem>]<n>[G or g][I or i][;]

CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE BUSY

Dial the phone number that corresponds with alphanumeric field in <str>

ATD><str>[G or g][I or i][;]

CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE BUSY

Redial the latest phone number dialled. Note that in case of multiplexer, e.g. 27.010 this command will send the latest dialled number

ATDL[G or g][I or i][;] CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER NO DIAL

Page 17: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 17 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

on the same channel as the ATDL command. This in contrast to the ATD>LD command, which will send the latest dialled number in total.

TONE BUSY

Description: This command instructs the MS to originate a call, which may be data or voice. The phone number used to establish the connection will consist of digits and modifiers included in <dial_string> or a stored number specified by the <mem>, <n> or <str> parameters, or dial modifier L. This allows for dialling from phonebook locations based on index or an alphanumeric field that identifies an entry in phonebook as well as from other <mem> storages such as Last Dialled Numbers (LD). Command Select Phonebook Memory Storage (+CPBS) is recommended to be used to select memory storage. Note! Only ME and SM memory storage are supported by ATD. If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that the number is a voice call rather than a data number. Dial command terminated by semicolon shall always give OK as terminating result code. Note: Other commands added in the same string after the ATD command are ignored. Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append additional control characters such as line feed after the command line termination character.

Defined values:

<dial_string> Description

“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # + A B C”

Valid characters for origination

D This character is a part of V.25ter, but is here only included for compatibility reasons, no code is transmitted for this character.

W The W modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

' The comma modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

T The T modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

P The P modifier is ignored but is included for

Page 18: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 18 of 272

<dial_string> Description compatibility reasons.

! The ! modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

@ The @ modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

<text> Description

9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s

4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s Final Result Codes For the use of final result codes NO DIALTONE and BUSY see the X command.

Alphabetic

(ATV1)

Numeric

(ATV0) Description

CONNECT 1 If connection is successfully established, and X0 is selected

CONNECT <text>

- If connection is successfully established and Xn is selected where "n" is any value other than 0. The meaning of the <text> parameter is explained below

NO CARRIER

3 Unable to establish a connection or the connection attempt was aborted by the user

ERROR 4 An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the connection

NO DIALTONE

6 The ME is being used for a voice call or is not within coverage of the network

BUSY 7 The ME number called is engaged, valid for data and voice connections

OK 0 Only valid for voice connections

<str> Description

String type

String type value, which should be equal to an alphanumeric field in a phonebook entry in the searched memories. Note: The character specifying which number in the contact entry that should be used must be included in the

Page 19: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 19 of 272

<str> Description string; e.g. "/H" for home number, "/M" for mobile number and so on.

<n> Description

Integer type

Memory location in the selected memory. This value should be in the range of locations available in the memory used.

<mem> Description

ME ME memory

SM SIM memory

LD Last Dialled memory. This is available, and may be used for dialling, but is not updated by the platform. This must be handled by an application.

Example: ATD07747008670; OK

2.3 ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service

Description Syntax Possible responses

Make a GPRS/Packet Domain call.

D*<GPRS/Packet Domain_SC>[*[<called_address>] [*[<L2P>][*[<cid>]]]]#

CONNECT NO CARRIER

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

Not applicable

Description: The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the ME to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The ME will return CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No

Page 20: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 20 of 272

further commands may follow on the AT command line. When layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an orderly shut down of the PDP or an error, the ME shall enter V.25ter command state and return the NO CARRIER final result code. <L2P> and <cid> are the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may be used in the modem initialisation AT command string to set values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc. NOTE: The dial string conforms to the syntax specified in 3GPP TS 22.030

Defined Values:

<GPRS/Packet_Domain SC>

Description

Integer type (GPRS/Packet Domain Service Code) a digit string (value 99) which identifies a request to use the GPRS/Packet Domain

<called_address> Description

String type Value received in this parameter is ignored by the platform.

<L2P> Description

1 PPP

<cid> Description

Integer type See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

2.4 ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service

Description Syntax Possible responses

Make a GPRS/Packet Domain call.

D*<GPRS/Packet Domain_SC_IP>[*<cid>]#

CONNECT NO CARRIER

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the

Not applicable

Page 21: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 21 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses

command is supported Description:

This command causes the ME to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the external Packet Data Network. The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the ME to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The ME shall return CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT command line. The detailed behaviour after the online data state has been entered is dependent on the PDP type. It is described briefly in clause 9 (for IP) of 3GPP TS 27.060. PS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands. When the layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an orderly shut down of the PDP or an error, the ME enters V.25ter command state and return the NO CARRIER final result code. The usage of <cid> is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem initialisation AT command string to set values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc.. If <cid> is omitted, the ME shall attempt to activate the context using: (a) any information provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure, e.g. the TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the ME, (b) a priori knowledge, e.g. the ME may implement only one PDP type (c) using the 'Empty PDP type' (3GPP TS 24.008). (No PDP address or APN shall be sent in this case and only one PDP context subscription record shall be present in the HLR for this subscriber.) This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes. NOTE: The dial string conforms to the syntax specified in 3GPP TS 22.030

Defined Values:

<GPRS/Packet_Domain SC_IP>

Description

Integer type (GPRS/Packet Domain Service Code) a digit string (value 98) which identifies a request to use the GPRS/Packet Domain with IP (PDP types IP & PPP)

Page 22: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 22 of 272

<cid> Description

Integer type See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

2.5 ATH Hang up

Description Command Possible Responses

Terminate the call ATH[<n>]

Test command to show if the command is supported

ATH=? H: (0)

Description: This command signals the MS to terminate an active call.

Defined Values:

<n> Description

0 Terminate a connection, only <n> = 0 supported.

2.6 ATO Return to Online Data Mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Return to on-line data mode ATO[<value>] CONNECT

CONNECT <text>

NO CARRIER

ERROR

Test command to show if the command is supported

ATO=? O: [0]

Description: Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.

Defined values:

<value> Description

0 Return to on-line data state from on-line command

Page 23: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 23 of 272

2.7 ATP Select Pulse dialing

Description Command Possible Responses

Select pulse dialing ATP OK

Test if the command is supported

ATP=? OK

Description: Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialing the number.

2.8 ATT Select Tone Dialing

Description Command Possible Responses

Select tone dialing ATT OK

Test if the command is supported

ATT=? OK

Description: This command is ignored. It is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialing the number.

2.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Set call progress monitoring control

ATX[=][<n>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting ATX? X: <n>

Test if the command is supported

ATX=? X: (list of supported <n>s)

Description: This command is used to indicate whether dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are used during a call set-up. You can also use this command to display the current dial-tone and busy-tone detection settings.

Defined values:

<n> Description

0 No BUSY or NO DIALTONE result codes given. No line speed

Page 24: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 24 of 272

<n> Description reported together with CONNECT result code.

1 Busy and dial tone detection off. Report line-speed on connection

2 No BUSY result code is given. NO DIALTONE result code returned if no network. Reports line speed together with CONNECT result code.

3 BUSY result code given if called line is busy. No NO DIALTONE result code is given. Reports line speed together with CONNECT result code.

4 BUSY result code is given if called line is busy. NO DIALTONE is given if no network. Report line speed together with CONNECT result code. Default value. Note: If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NO DIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned.

2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call

Description Command Possible Responses

Request hang-up AT+CHUP OK

ERROR Description:

This command causes the TA to hang up the current CS call of the MT. If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming call is rejected. The purpose of this command is not to replace the V.25ter command "H", but to give an assured procedure to terminate an alternating mode call.

2.11 AT+CLCC List Current Calls

Description Syntax Possible Responses

Get list of current calls from the MS

AT+CLCC [+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[,<alpha>[,<priority>]

Page 25: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 25 of 272

Description Syntax Possible Responses ]] [<CR><LF> +CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[,<alpha>[,<priority>]]] [...]]]

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLCC=?

OK

Description: This command returns the list of current calls of MT. If command succeeds but no calls are available, no information response is sent to TE.

Defined values:

<idx> Description

integer Call identification number as described in 3GPP TS 22.030.

<dir> Description

0 Mobile originated (MO) call

1 Mobile terminated (MT) call

<stat> Description

0 Active

1 Held

2 Dialing (MO call)

3 Alerting (MO call)

4 Incoming (MT call)

5 Waiting (MT call)

<mode> Description

0 Voice

1 Data

Page 26: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 26 of 272

<mode> Description

9 Unknown

<mpty> Description

0 Call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties

1 Call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties

<number> Description

String Phone number in format specified by <type>

<type> Description

Integer type Type of address octet, refer 3GPP 24.008

128 Unknown numbering plan, national / international number unknown

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128...155 Other values refer to 3GPP 24.008

<alpha> Description

String Alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set AT+CSCS

<priority> Description

Integer type

optional digit type parameter indicating the eMLPP priority level of the call, values specified in 3GPP TS 22.067

0-4 Valid values

Page 27: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 27 of 272

3 Control and Status

3.1 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Automatic answer control

ATS0=[<rcnt>] OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

ATS0? <rcnt>

Test if the command is supported

ATS0=? S0: (list of supported <rcnt>s)

Description: This command sets the number of call indications (rings) before automatically answering the call; value equaling zero disables automatic answering and is the default setting.

Defined values:

<rcnt> Description

0 Disable automatic answer. Default value

1-7 Answer after the specified number of rings When <rcnt> is displayed using ATS0?, leading zeroes are added to make the result 3 digits.

3.2 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character

Description Command Possible Responses

Set escape sequence character

ATS2=[<esc>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

ATS2? <esc>

Test if the command is supported

ATS2=? S2: (list of supported <esc>s)

Description: Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The response to the command is modified to reflect the change.

Defined values:

Page 28: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 28 of 272

<esc> Description

128 Default value. Escape function disabled by default.

0 to 127 Escape sequence character

128-255 Escape function not enabled Note: If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the escape sequence detection is disabled.

3.3 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Command Line Termination Character

ATS3=[<value>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting ATS3? <value>

Test if the command is supported

ATS3=? S3: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter. The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3 setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3 as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3 was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued, the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/14) in place of the <CR>.

Defined values:

<value> Description

013 Command line termination character <CR>, Default value

0 to 127 Command line termination character

3.4 ATS4 Response Formatting Character

Page 29: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 29 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Response Formatting Character

ATS4=[<value>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting ATS4? <value>

Test if the command is supported

ATS4=? S4: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the description of the V command for usage). If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.

Defined values:

<value> Description

010 Formatting character <LF>. Default value

0 to 127 Formatting character

3.5 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)

Description Command Possible Responses

Request Command Line Editing Character

ATS5=[<value>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting ATS5? <value>

Test if the command is supported

ATS5=? S5: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character that indicates, when recognized by the DCE , a request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character.

Defined values:

<value> Description

008 Line editing character, <BS>. Default value

Page 30: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 30 of 272

<value> Description

0 to 127 Line editing character

3.6 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Blind dial delay control ATS6=[<dly>] OK

Show the current setting

ATS6? <dly>

Test if the command is supported

ATS6=? S6: (list of supported <dly>s)

Description: This command is included for compatibility. No functionality

<dly> Description

2 Wait two seconds before blind dialing. Default value

2-10 Number of seconds to wait before blind dialing

3.7 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout

Description Command Possible Responses

Set connection completion timeout

ATS7=[<tmo>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

ATS7? <tmo>

Test if the command is supported

ATS7=? S7: (list of supported <tmo>s)

Description: Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialing and the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the connection is aborted.

Defined values:

<tmo> Description

50 Timeout value in seconds. Default value

1-255 Timeout value in seconds

Page 31: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 31 of 272

3.8 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control

ATS8=[<dly>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting ATS8? <dly>

Test if the command is supported

ATS8=? S8: (list of supported <dly>s)

Description: This command sets the number of seconds to wait when a comma dial modifier is encountered in the dial string of the D command. The default is 2 seconds. This command is included for compatibility only. No functionality

<dly> Description

2 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value

2-10

The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds

3.9 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Automatic Disconnect Delay Control

ATS10=[<val>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

ATS10? <val>

Test if the command is supported

ATS10=? S10: (list of supported <val>s)

Description: This command sets the number of tenths of seconds to wait before disconnecting after TA has indicated the absence of received line signal. This command is included for compatibility. No functionality.

<val> Description

2 Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value

1-254 Number of tenths of a second of delay

Page 32: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 32 of 272

3.10 AT+CEER Extended Error Report

Description Command Possible Responses

Request an Extended Error Report

AT+CEER +CEER: <report>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CEER=?

OK

ERROR Description:

This command causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text, <report> , which offers the user of the TA an extended report for the following events: •Failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering) or in-call modification •Last call release •Last unsuccessful GPRS attach or unsuccessful PDP context activation •Last GPRS detach or PDP context deactivation Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure information given by the network in text format.

Defined values:

<report> Description

Unquoted character string

The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters. Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>

3.11 AT+CIND Indicator Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Indicator Control

AT+CIND=[<ind> [,<ind>[,…]]]

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CIND? +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Page 33: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 33 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CIND=? +CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)), (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)),…

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command shows the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the indicator is off (or in a state which can be identified as “off” state), 1 means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than “off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The list of <ind>s is returned as an ordered list of values without identifiers - the position of each <ind> in the list must be determined by using the test command. The ME does not allow setting of indicators, ERROR is returned from the set command. Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum 16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to 3GPP 27.007).

Notes: The indicator <descr>="signal" represents the relative signal level (e.g. number of "bars") for both GSM and WCDMA signals. This is the preferred method for obtaining signal level for both technology types. Note that +CSQ is available to obtain GSM signal levels only and an indicator mapping algorithm must be applied to the raw RSSI values returned by +CSQ, whereas +CIND may be used to obtain levels for both technology types. There is no method available for the TE to obtain the raw WCDMA signal values from the ME. The range of values reported in "signal" may vary by implementation. The default range is (0-5), however the test command should be used to determine the currently reported range. The maximum possible range of "signal" is (0-9). Indicators which apply only to phones and not to Data Card devices may appear in the test command results. Indicators listed below as (not applicable) may have reported values but are meaningless for a Data Card device.

Defined values:

Page 34: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 34 of 272

<descr> Description order number

"battchg" Battery charge level (0-5) (not applicable)

1

“signal” Signal quality

Default range: (0-5)

Maximum range: (0-9)

2

"batterywarning" Battery warning (0-1) (not applicable)

3

"chargerconnected" Charger connected (0-1) (not applicable)

4

“service” Network service availability (0-1) 5

“sounder” Sounder activity (0-1) (not applicable)

6

“message” Message received (0-1) 7

“call” Call in progress (0-1) 8

“roam” Roaming indicator (0-1) (0=Home, 1=Roaming)

9

“sms full” A short message memory storage in the MT has become full (1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is (0-1). Applies to SIM and ME memory.

10

"callsetup" Bluetooth proprietary call set up status indicator. Possible values are as follows: Not currently in call set up (0), incoming call process ongoing (1), outgoing call set up is ongoing (2), remote party being alerted in an outgoing call (3); i.e the range is (0-3)

(not applicable)

11

"callheld" Bluetooth propritary call hold status indicator. Possible values are as follows: No calls currently on hold (0), a call is currently on hold.

(not applicable)

12

Note: order number in the above table is used only in +CIEV unsolicited response

Page 35: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 35 of 272

<ind> Description

Integer type

Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>

Example: AT+CIND=? +CIND: ("battchg",(0-5)),("signal",(0-5)),("batterywarning",(0-1)),("chargerconnected",(0-1)),("service",(0-1)),("sounder",(0-1)),("message",(0-1)),("call",(0-1)),("roam",(0-1)),("smsfull",(0-1)),("callsetup",(0-3)),("callheld",(0-1)) OK AT+CIND? +CIND: 5,5,0,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,0,0 OK

3.12 AT* List all Supported AT Commands

Description Command Possible Responses

List all implemented AT commands

AT* <AT Command1> [<CR><LF>

<AT Command2> […

[<CR><LF><ATCommandN>]]]

OK

+CME ERROR: <err> Description:

Lists all the commands supported by the MS.

3.13 AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands

Description Command Possible Responses

List available AT Commands

AT+CLAC <AT Command1> [<CR><LF>

<AT Command2> […

[<CR><LF><ATCommandN>]]]

OK

+CME ERROR: <err> Description:

This command returns the AT commands that are available to the user.

Page 36: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 36 of 272

3.14 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error

Description Command Possible Responses

Request Mobile Equipment Error

AT+CMEE=[<n>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CMEE? +CMEE: <n>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMEE=? +CMEE: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA functionality. For more information, refer to “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR instead. Default value

1 Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric <err> values.

2 Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose <err> values.

3.15 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) Description:

This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If +CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a command line, none of the commands in the same command line will be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE command. The V.25ter command V does not affect the format of this result code. The following table provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.

Page 37: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 37 of 272

<err> Description (General Errors)

0 Module failure

1 No connection to phone

3 Operation not allowed

4 Operation not supported

5 PH-SIM PIN required

6 PH-FSIM PIN Required

7 PH-FSIM PUK Required

10 SIM not inserted

11 SIM PIN required

12 SIM PUK required

13 SIM failure

14 SIM busy

15 SIM wrong

16 Incorrect password

17 SIM PIN2 required

18 SIM PUK2 required

20 Memory or List full

21 Invalid index within the list

22 Item not available or list empty

23 Memory failure

24 Text string or parameter too long

25 Invalid characters in text string

26 Dial string too long

27 Invalid characters in dial string

30 No network service

31 Network time-out

32 Network not allowed - emergency calls only

40 Network personalization PIN required

41 Network personalization PUK required

42 Network subset personalization PIN required

43 Network subset personalization PUK required

44 Service provider personalization PIN required

45 Service provider personalization PUK required

46 Corporate personalization PIN required

Page 38: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 38 of 272

<err> Description (General Errors)

47 Corporate personalization PUK required

51 - 99

Reserved

100 Unknown

103 Illegal MS

106 Illegal ME

107 GPRS Service not allowed

111 PLMN not allowed

112 Location area not allowed

113 Roaming not allowed in this location area

132 Service option not supported

133 Requested service option not subscribed

134 Service option temporarily out of order

148 Unspecified GPRS error

149 PDP authentication failure

150 Invalid Mobile class

151- 256

Reserved

257 Syntax Error

258 Invalid Parameter

259 Length ERROR

260 SIM Authentication Failure

261 SIM File Error (either wrong ID or content corrupted)

262 File System Failure (GDFS error)

263 Service Unavailable

264 Phonebook Not Ready

265 Phonebook Not Supported

266 Command Line Too Long

267 Parameter out of range

268 Band not allowed

269 Supplementary Service failure

270 Command aborted

271 Action already in progress

272 WAN Disabled on Host

273 - Reserved

Page 39: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 39 of 272

3.16 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting

Description Command Possible Responses

Set ME activity status

AT+CMER=[<mode>[,<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+CMER?

+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMER=?

+CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported <disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s), (list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

The command enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from the ME to the TE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state changes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. Test command returns the modes supported by the TA as compound values.

Defined values: <mode> Description3

0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place or the oldest ones can be discarded. (Default)

3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; There is no inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

Page 40: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 40 of 272

<keyp> Description

0 No keypad event reporting

<disp> Description

0 No display event reporting

<ind> Description

0 No indicator event reporting

1 Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV: <ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number (as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of indicator.

<bfr> Description

0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered

Unsolicited Result Codes: +CIEV: <ind>,<value>

3.16.1 +CIEV Indicator Event Unsolicited reports Description:

This unsolicited result code is enabled with the AT+CMER command and indicates changes in indicator levels. <ind> in the table below indicates the indicator order number (as specified for AT+CIND). The +CIEV result code has the following syntax: +CIEV: <ind>,<value>

Defined values: <ind> <value> Description

2 0-x

(x varies - see +CIND)

Signal quality indicator

5 0-1 Service indicator

7 0-1 Message Received (SMS)

8 0-1 Call in progress indicator

9 0-1 roam indicator

10 0-1 SMS memory full Note: See +CIND for details on <value> definitions.

Page 41: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 41 of 272

3.17 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) Description:

This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line will be executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails. The syntax is as follows: +CMS ERROR: <err> Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.

<err> Description

0 - 127 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values

128 - 255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values

300 ME failure

301 SMS service of ME reserved

302 Operation not allowed

303 Operation not supported

304 Invalid PDU mode parameter

305 Invalid text mode parameter

310 SIM not inserted

311 SIM PIN required

312 PH-SIM PIN required

313 SIM failure

314 SIM busy

315 SIM wrong

316 SIM PUK required

317 SIM PIN2 required

318 SIM PUK2 required

320 Memory failure

321 Invalid memory index

322 Memory full

330 SMSC address unknown

331 No network service

332 Network time-out

340 No +CNMA acknowledgment expected

500 Unknown error

Page 42: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 42 of 272

<err> Description

999 OK

3.18 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status

Description Command Possible Responses

Execute ME Activity Status

AT+CPAS[=<mode>] +CPAS: <pas>

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the ME before requesting action from the ME. When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the command returns <pas> values from 0 to 128 (for supported values see table below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Sony Ericsson specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the table below). Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound value: refer to 3GPP 27.007.

Defined values: <pas> Description

0 Ready (MT allows commands from TA/TE)

1 Unavailable (MT does not allow commands from TA/TE)

2 Unknown (MT is not guaranteed to respond to instructions)

3 Ringing (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the ringer is active)

4 Call in progress (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but a call is in progress)

5 asleep (MT is unable to process commands from TA/TE because it is in a low functionality state)

Page 43: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 43 of 272

<pas> Description

129 Not in call

130 Mobile originated call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call in progress’

131 Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call in progress’

<mode> Description

0 Restricts the CPAS to return only standard <pas>values

1 Allows the CPAS to return Sony Ericsson specific <pas> values, such as 129, 130 and 131

Example: AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (0-5,129-131) OK AT+CPAS +CPAS: 0 OK

3.19 AT+CPWD Change Password

Description Command Possible Responses

Request facility lock

AT+CPWD=<fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd>

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPWD=? +CPWD: (<fac1>,<pwdlength1>), (<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),…

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command Facility Lock +CLCK. Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities and the maximum length of their password.

Defined values:

Page 44: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 44 of 272

<fac> Description

"PS" PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted)

“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock command issued)

“AO” BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)

“OI” BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)

“AI” BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)

“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)

“OX” BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)

“AB” All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

“AG” All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

“AC” All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

"P2" SIM PIN2

<oldpwd> Description

string type

<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with the change password command, +CPWD

<newpwd> Description

string type

<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of password can be determined with <pwdlength>

<pwdlength> Description

Integer type Maximum length of the password for the facility

<err> See Listing of CME ERROR values Example:

AT+CPWD=“SC”,“0000”,“0001” OK

3.20 AT+CR Service Reporting Control

Page 45: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 45 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Service Reporting Control

AT+CR=<mode> OK

ERROR

Read current setting AT+CR? +CR: <mode>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CR=? +CR: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command controls whether intermediate bearer capability result code +CR: <serv> is returned from the TA to the TE. If service reporting is enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during connect negotiation at which the TA has determined the speed and quality of service that will be used, before any error control or data compression reports are transmitted, and before the intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. Note: This command replaces old V.25ter command Modulation Reporting Control +MR, which is not appropriate for use in the GSM network. Possible error control (other than radio link protocol) and data compression reporting can be enabled with V.25ter commands Error Control Reporting +ER and Data Compression Reporting +DR.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Disable reporting. Default value

1 Enable reporting

3.20.1 +CR Service Reporting Unsolicited Response Description:

The +CR unsolicited messages are enabled and disabled by the AT+CR command. Format: +CR: <serv>

<serv> Description

ASYNC Asynchronous transparent

SYNC Synchronous transparent

REL ASYNC

Asynchronous non-transparent

Page 46: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 46 of 272

<serv> Description

REL SYNC Synchronous non-transparent

GPRS [<L2P>]

GPRS

The optional <L2P> proposes a layer 2 protocol to use between the MT and the TE. It is defined in the Enter GPRS Data Mode (+CGDATA) command.

3.21 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Cellular Result Code option

AT+CRC=[<mode>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CRC? +CRC: <mode>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CRC=? +CRC: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command controls whether the extended format of incoming call indication or GPRS network request for PDP context activation or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used. When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING

Note: Similar command may be found in TIA IS-99 and TIA IS-135. Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Disables extended format. Default.

1 Enables extended format

3.21.1 +CRING Incoming Call Type Notification Description:

The +CRING unsolicited message replaces the normal RING message when it is enabled by the AT+CRC command. The following message format is used: +CRING: <type>

Additional Information

Page 47: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 47 of 272

In order to not confuse the UR code with a command response, the UR code is withheld if it occurs in the time between a command termination character is received and a final result code is sent.

<type> Description

ASYNC Asynchronous transparent

SYNC Synchronous transparent

REL ASYNC Asynchronous non-transparent

REL SYNC Synchronous non-transparent

FAX Facsimile

VOICE Normal voice call

GPRS GPRS network request for PDP context activiation

3.22 AT+CSQ Signal Strength

Description Command Possible Responses

Request Signal Strength

AT+CSQ +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSQ=? +CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported as compound values.

Additional Information: For WCDMA the returned values are +CSQ: 99,99 It is recommended to use the +CIND command.

Defined values: <rssi> Description

0 -113dBm or less

1 -111dBm

2..30 -109… -53dBm

Page 48: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 48 of 272

<rssi> Description

31 -51dBm or greater

99 Not known or not detectable

<ber> Description (BER = Bit Error Rate)

99 Not known or not detectable

3.23 AT*ECAM Call Monitoring

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Call Monitoring on or off

AT*ECAM=<onoff> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT*ECAM? *ECAM: <on/off>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ECAM=? *ECAM: list of supported <on/off>s

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc. It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is two fold: •to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE; •to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an ongoing call.

Defined values:

Page 49: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 49 of 272

<onoff> Description

0 The call log function is disabled (off). Default value

1 The call log function is enabled (on)

3.23.1 *ECAV Call Monitoring Unsolicited Result Code Description:

The *ECAV result code is issued every time there is a change in the progress of a call. The *ECAV result code has the following syntax. *ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>[,<processid>][,exitcause][,<number>,<type>] <ccid>: This is an integer value identifying the call for which the progress has changed. Unless more than one call is in progress, this value will be 1. The maximum number of call control processes is 7 (5 multiparty members, 1 call on hold, 1 call waiting).

Defined values: <ccid> Description

0 - 7 Id of the call for which progress change is reported. <ccstatus>: This is an integer value showing the status of the call.

<ccstatus> Description

0 IDLE.

1 CALLING. Mobile Originated (outgoing) call started.

2 CONNECTING. Mobile Originated (outgoing) call in the process of establishing a connection.

3 ACTIVE. Connection established between A and B.

4 HOLD. Connection put on hold.

5 WAITING. Mobile Terminated (incoming).

6 ALERTING. Mobile Terminated (incoming) call ringing or Mobile Originated (outgoing) ringback (remote end ringing) detected.

7 BUSY. <calltype>: This is an integer identifying what type of call is in progress.

<calltype> Description

1 Voice.

2 Data

4 FAX. Not supported

Page 50: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 50 of 272

<calltype> Description

128 Voice 2. <processid>: This is an integer identifying the process that the module returns to after returning to the IDLE state.

<processid> Description

08 CC. Call Control

68 MM. Mobile Management.

69 MS. Mobile Station.

122 RR. Radio Resources. <exitcause>: This is an integer value showing why the call ended. Only reported when returning to the IDLE state (<ccstatus>=0).

<exitcause> Description

1 Unassigned (unallocated) number.

3 No route to destination.

6 Channel unacceptable.

8 Operator determined barring.

16 Normal call clearing.

17 User busy.

18 No user responding.

19 User alerting, no answer.

21 Call rejected.

22 Number changed.

25 Pre-emption.

26 Non selected user clearing.

27 Destination out of order.

28 Invalid number format (incomplete number).

29 Facility rejected.

30 Response to STATUS ENQUIRY.

31 Normal, unspecified.

34 No circuit/channel available.

38 Network out of order.

41 Temporary failure.

42 Switching equipment congestion.

43 Access information discarded.

44 requested circuit/channel not available.

Page 51: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 51 of 272

<exitcause> Description

47 Resources unavailable, unspecified.

49 Quality of service unavailable.

50 Requested facility not subscribed.

55 Incoming calls barred within the CUG.

57 Bearer capability not authorized.

58 Bearer capability not presently available.

63 Service or option not available, unspecified.

65 Bearer service not implemented.

68 ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax.

69 Requested Facility not yet implemented.

70 Only Restricted Digital information bearer capability is available.

79 Service or option not implemented, unspecified.

81 Invalid Transaction Identifier value.

87 User not member of CUG.

88 Incompatible Destination.

91 Invalid transit network selection.

95 Semantically incorrect message.

96 Invalid mandatory information.

97 Message type non-existent or not implemented.

98 Message type not compatible with protocol state.

99 Information element non-existent or not implemented

100 Conditional IE Error

101 Message not compatible with protocol state

102 Recovery on timer expiry

111 Protocol error, unspecified

127 Inter-working unspecified

150 Radio Path Not Available

255 Empty <number>: A string containing the phone number of the party calling the module (Mobile Terminated) or the party called from the module (Mobile Originated). The <number> is only shown for state CALLING (1) and ALERTING (6) for MT calls.

<number> Description

String String of valid dial characters (‘0’-‘9’, ‘+’, ‘#’, ‘*’, ‘A’, ‘B’,

Page 52: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 52 of 272

<number> Description and ‘C’)

<type>: This is an integer identifying the type of number displayed in <number>.

<type> Description

Integer Type of address octet in integer format (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7). ; default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129.

Page 53: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 53 of 272

4 Operational Control and Status

4.1 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality

Description Command Possible Responses

Set MS functionality AT+CFUN=<fun> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Show the current setting

AT+CFUN? +CFUN: <fun>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CFUN=? +CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level “full functionality” results in the highest level of power drawn. “Minimum functionality” results in the minimum power drawn. This command may also be used to restrict the supported Radio Access Technology (RAT) of the ME between GSM only or WCDMA only. Test command returns values supported by the ME.

Notes: Switching to Power Down mode <fun>=0, results in a complete power down of the ME, and it is then no longer responsive to further AT commands. The ME must be reset by removing and reinserting the device in order to reestablish control. For this reason, <fun>=0 should never be used with an internal minicard ME unless the host system is shutting down and power to the card slot is guaranteed to be cycled. In order to set the ME to minimal functionality and still retain the ability for further software control, <fun>=4 should be used. For PCI Express mini card products, note that the W_Disable_N input signal will also have an effect on the CFUN state, and the allowed CFUN values. When this signal prevents turning on the radio with <fun>=1, 5, or 6, a specific CME ERROR (WAN Disabled on Host) will be returned to indicate this failure cause.

Defined values:

<fun> Description

0 Power down.

Page 54: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 54 of 272

<fun> Description

1 Full functionality

2 Not supported

3 Not supported

4 Disable transmit and receive RF circuits. SIM still enabled. This is often referred to as "flight mode."

Default value

5 GSM only (WCDMA radio is off)

6 WCDMA only (GSM radio is off)

4.2 AT*E2RESET Restart Module

Description Command Possible Responses

Perform a restart of the device firmware

AT*E2RESET OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*E2RESET=? OK

ERROR Description:

This command is used to cause the module to reset and restart. The software internally will allow a watch dog timeout to occur which will reset the microcontroller’s internal registers and restart the software at the beginning of operation. Most blocks internal to the module will be reset and reinitialized. All settings and levels set by previous AT commands that are not stored in non-volatile memory will have to be reissued. The general result of this command is to return as much of the system back to normal power on conditions. The power state will be returned to CFUN=4 after the reset. This command is available without SIM access. Note: The proper radio access operations as defined by 3GPP will be performed prior to the reset. e.g. if the device is GPRS attached and registered then a detach and power-down registration will be performed.

4.3 AT+CMAR Master Reset

Description Command Possible Responses

Perform a master reset in the MS

AT+CMAR=<ME_lock_code> +CME ERROR: <err>

Page 55: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 55 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMAR=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the MS.

<ME_lock_code> Description

String Security code (ME_lock_code) must be verified before performing the master reset, see also AT+CLCK

Page 56: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 56 of 272

5 Profiles

5.1 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile

Description Command Possible Responses

Execute AT&F[=][<profile>] OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT&F=? &F: (list of supported factory profiles)

Description: This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters in the current profile to default values specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria. This command modifies parameters in volatile memory. In order to commit these changes to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed after AT&F has returned OK. If AT&W is not executed, the AT&F effect will not survive a reset.

Defined values: <profile> Description

0 Factory profile to restore (only profile 0 is supported) Configuration Profile Settings and Default Values The commands AT&F, ATZ, and AT&W allow the user to restore, and store the current profile parameter values outlined in the table below.

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

Result Code Suppression

ATQ (0-1) 0 - Quiet Mode is off

DCE Response Format

ATV (0-1) 1 - Verbose is on

Call Progress Monitoring Control

ATX (0-1) 0 - Don't Show Speed

Calling Line ID Restricted

AT+CLIR (0-2) 0 - Don't use Network Setting

Page 57: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 57 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

Extended Error Reporting

AT+CMEE (0-2) 0 - CMEE is off

Command Echo

ATE (0-1) 1 - Echo is on

Handshake Mode

AT\Q (0-2) 1 - HW handshake

Circuit 108 Response (Data Terminal Ready)

AT&D (0-2) 0 - DTR Ignore

Circuit 107 Response (Data Set Ready)

AT&S (0-1) 0 - DSR On

Circuit 109 Control (Carrier Detect)

AT&C (0-2) 1 - DCD Passage

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control

AT+IFC (0-3) DCE_DTE,

(0-2) DTE_DCE

2 - HW,

2 - HW

Select bearer service type

AT+CBST (0-134) Speed,

(0-7) Name,

(0-3) Connection Element

7 - 9600bps,

0 - Data Ckt Async,

1 - Non-transparent

Calling Line Identification Presentation

AT+CLIP (0-1) 0 - Off

Connected Line Identification Presentation

AT+COLP (0-1) 0 - Off

Operator Selection

AT+COPS (0-2) 0 - Long Alphanumeric

Page 58: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 58 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

Format

Service Reporting Control

AT+CR (0-1) 0 - Off

Cellular Result Code (extended)

AT+CRC (0-1) 0 - Off

Network Registration

AT+CREG (0-2) 0 - Off

Radio Link Protocol

AT+CRLP (1-61) IWS,

(1-61) MS,

(48-255)T1,

(1-255) N2

61,

61,

48,

6

Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting

AT+ILRR (0-1) 0 - Off

Select Character Set

AT+CSCS (0-7) 0 - PCCP437

Advice of Charge

AT+CAOC (0-2) 0 - Query mode

Call Meter Maximum Event

AT+CCWE (0-1) 0 - Off

Phonebook Storage Select

AT+CPBS (FD,LD,ME,MT,SM,DC,RC,MC,EN,ON

SM - SIM Phonebook

Call Waiting

AT+CCWA (0-1) Capability,

(0-2) Mode,

(0-128) Bearer

0 - Off,

0 - Off,

1 - Voice

Interface Port Command

AT+IPR (0,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200,230400,460800

0 - Auto

Page 59: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 59 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

,921600)

Single Numbering Scheme

AT+CSNS 0 Voice, 4 Data

0 - Voice

Message Waiting Indication

AT*EMWI (0-2) 0 - Off

Network Info AT*ERINFO (0-1) 0 - Off

DRX Reporting Mode

AT*EDRX (0-1) 0 - Off

SIM Detection Reporting

AT*E2SDR (0-1) 0 - Off

Cell Description

AT*E2CD (0-1) 0 - Off

Operational Temperature Reporting

AT*E2OTR (0-1) 0 - Off

IP Setup Parameters:

Initial Timeout,

Retransmit Count,

Send Block Size

Send Interval Wait,

Lock Escape Sequence,

OpenTimeout

AT*E2IPS (1-10),

(3-8) ,

(1-10),

(255-1460),

(0,1),

(0-120)

2,

8,

2,

1020,

0,

64

Escape Sequence Guard Time (GPRS)

AT*E2ESC (0-10) 0 - No Guard Time

Unstructured Supplementa

AT+CUSD (0-2) 0 - Off

Page 60: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 60 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

ry Service Data

Call Monitoring

AT*ECAM (0-1) 0 - Off

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting

AT+CMER (0-3) Reporting,

(0-1) Capability

0 - Off/Buffer,

0 - Off

Supplementary Service Notification

AT+CSSN (0-1) MO unsol,

(0-1) MT unsol

0 - Off,

0 - Off

Expanded Indicator Control

AT*ECIND (0-1) for each indicator

0 - Off (for all)

Pin Event AT*EPEE (0-1) 0 - Off

Module State Check and Report in State Change

AT*EMRDY (0-1) 0 - Off

Restart Message

AT*ESRB (0-1) 1 - On

DTMF Duration in sec

AT+VTD (1-1000) 1

SMS

Cell Broadcast Message Type

AT+CSCB (0-1) Mode,

N/A Msg Id,

N/A, CBM DCS

0 - Accept,

"" - Empty,

"" - Empty

Set Text Mode Parameters

AT+CSMP (0-255) First Oct,

(0-255) Valid Pd,

(0-255) Prot Id,

(0-255) DCS

17,

167,

0,

0

Show Text AT+CSDH (0-1) 0 - Don't

Page 61: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 61 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

Mode Parameters

show

New Message Indication

AT+CNMI (0-1) Unsol Msg,

(0-3) Rcv Msg,

(0-3) Cell Bcast,

(0-2) Status Rept,

0 Buffered Result

1 - Discard,

0 - None,

0 - None,

0 - None,

0 - Flush

GPRS

Controls unsol output when change in network

AT+CGREG (0-2) 0 - Disable

GPRS: Packet domain event reporting

AT+CGEREP (0-2) Mode,

(0-1) Buffer Effect

1 - Discard,

1 - Flush

PDP Context AT+CGDCONT

(1-20) Ctxt id,

("IP", "IPV4", "IPV6") PDP Type,

N/A PDP Addr,

(0-2) data comp,

(0-4) hdr comp

Empty (No PDPcontexts defined).

Minimum QoS profile for PDP Context

AT+CGEQMIN

See AT+CGEQMIN

Empty (No QoS profiles for any PDP contexts).

Requested QoS profile for PDP

AT+CGEQREQ

See AT+CGEQREQ

Empty (No QoS profiles for any PDP

Page 62: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 62 of 272

Parameter Description

AT Command Range Factory Defined Values

Context contexts).

Internet Account Settings

AT*ENAD See AT*ENAD

Empty (No internet accounts for any PDP contexts).

Global Settings

Input/Output Read/Write

AT*E2IO N/A 0

SIM Selection AT*ESSE (0-1) 0 - Internal

Ring indicator for SMS (duration of ring pulse in steps of 50ms)

AT*E2SMSRI (0-1150) 0 (ms)

Daylight Saving Time (adjustment)

AT*EDST (0-2) 0 - STD

Automatic Time Zone update (capability)

AT+CTZU (0-1) 0

Operator Selection Mode

AT+COPS (0-1,3) 0 - Automatic

Operator Selection (operator name)

AT+COPS Only used when mode is set to manual

"" (empty string)

SMS Bearer Mode

AT+CGSMS (0-3) 3 - CSD preferred

GPRS AutoAttach

AT*E2GAA (0-2) 0 - Never Attach

Service Center Address

AT+CSCA N/A Address,

129 Type

"" - Empty,

129 - National

Page 63: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 63 of 272

Example: AT&F OK

5.2 AT&W Store Configuration Profile

Description Command Possible Responses

Stores the current user profile to non volatile memory

AT&W[=][<profile>] OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT&W=? &W: (list of supported profile ids)

Description: This command stores the current profile in non-volatile memory. The profile in non-volatile memory is mapped to the <profile> parameter. If a profile exists in non-volatile memory for <profile>, it is overwritten with the current profile. See the AT&F description for a list of all parameter settings stored in the configuration profile.

Defined values: < profile>

Description

0 Stores current profile to location <profile>. (Only profile 0 is supported)

5.3 ATZ Restore Configuration Profile

Description Command Possible Responses

Execute ATZ[=][<profile>] OK

ERROR

Show if supported and list available parameter range

ATZ=? Z: (list of supported profile ids)

Description: This command instructs the DCE to restore the configuration profile from non-volatile memory that corresponds to <profile> . Consider hardware configuration switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using this command. The current profile is replaced with the configuration profile from non-volatile memory.

Page 64: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 64 of 272

Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will be ignored. See AT&F for a list of parameters available in a configuration profile.

Defined values: <profile> Description

0 Select the profile to restore. (Only profile 0 is supported)

Page 65: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 65 of 272

6 Time Commands

6.1 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date

Description Command Possible Responses

Set the real time clock of the ME

AT+CCLK=<time> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting AT+CCLK? +CCLK: <time>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CCLK=? OK

ERROR Description:

Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting of the clock.

Defined values: <time> Description

string Format is “yyyy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year (four digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”

Example: AT+CCLK? +CCLK: “00/01/01,22:54:48+00” OK AT+CCLK=“19/11/02,09:30:00+00” OK

Page 66: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 66 of 272

7 Data - CSD

7.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type

Description Command Possible Responses

Select bearer service type

AT+CBST=[<speed>, [<name>,[<ce>]]]

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CBST? +CBST: <speed>,<name>, <ce>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CBST=? +CBST: (list of supported <speed>s,list of supported <name>s, list of supported <ce>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup, especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls. Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.

Defined values: <speed> Description

0 Auto selection of speed. Only possible in case of 3.1 kHz modem and non-transparent service.

Default value

7 9600 bps V.32

12 9600 bps V.34

14 14400 bps V.34

15 19200 bps V.34

16 28800 bps V.34

17 33600 bps V.34

39 9600 bps (V.120)

Page 67: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 67 of 272

<speed> Description

43 14400 bps (V.120)

47 19200 bps (V.120)

48 28800 bps (V.120)

49 38400 bps (V.120)

50 48000 bps (V.120)

51 56000 bps (V.120)

71 9600 bps V.110 (ISDN)

75 14400 bps V.110 (ISDN)

79 19200 bps V.110 (ISDN)

80 28800 bps V.110 (ISDN)

81 38400 bps V.110 (ISDN)

82 48000 bps V.110 (ISDN)

83 56000 bps V.110 (ISDN)

84 64000 bps (X.31 flag stuffing)

<name> Description

0 Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1 KHz modem). Default value.

4 Data circuit asynchronous (RDI)

<ce> Description

0 Transparent

1 Non transparent. Default value.

7.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol

Description Command Possible Responses

Set radio link protocol

AT+CRLP=[<iws> [,<mws>[,<T1> [,<N2>[,<ver>[,<T4>]]]]]

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CRLP? +CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<ver1>[,<T4>]

<CR><LF>

Page 68: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 68 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

+CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<ver2>[,<T4>]

[...]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CRLP=? +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of supported <T1>s), (list of supported<N2>s),<ver1>[,(list of supported <T4>s] [<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of supported <T1>s), (list of supported <N2>s),<ver2>[,(list of supported <T4>s][...]]

OK

ERROR Description:

Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by the device. Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version <verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx> are returned. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Defined values: <iws> Description

Supported values 1 to 61

IWF to MS window size. Default value is 61.

Page 69: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 69 of 272

<mws> Description

Supported values 1 to 61

MS to IWF window size. Default value is 61.

<T1> Description

Supported values 38 to 100

Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms). Default value is 59.

<N2> Description

Supported values 0 to 255

Re-transmission attempts N2. Default value is 6.

<T4> Description

3 - 255 Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms). Default value is 5. Only applicable to V2

<ver> Description

Integer

0, 1, 2

RLP version.

Note: versions 0 and 1 share the same parameter set.

Page 70: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 70 of 272

8 Data - GPRS

8.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate

Description Command Possible Responses

Activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s)

AT+CGACT=<state> [,<cid>[,<cid>]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the command

AT+CGACT? +CGACT: <cid>, <state>[<CR><LF> +CGACT: <cid>, <state>[…]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). Before a context may be activated it must be defined by the command AT+CGDCONT. If a context is not already attached to the GPRS network then this command will automatically attach before attempting the activation. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR or +CME ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific contexts. If no <cid>s are specified, then the activation form of the command activates all defined contexts and the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts.

Defined values: <state> Description

0 PDP context activation deactivated

1 PDP context activation activated

Page 71: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 71 of 272

<cid> Description

Integer Reference to a PDP context identifier

previously defined with AT+CGDCONT

8.2 AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify

Description Command Possible Responses

Activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s)

AT+CGCMOD=[<cid> [,<cid>[,[,…]]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGCMOD=? +CGCMOD: (list of <cid>s associated with active contexts)

Description: The execution command is used to modify the specified PDP context(s) with respect to QoS profiles and TFTs. After the command has completed, the MT returns to V.25ter online data state. If the requested modification for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. If no <cid>s are specified, the activation form of the command modifies all active contexts. The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.

Defined values: <cid> Description

Integer type See AT+CGDCONT command for range

8.3 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach

Description Command Possible Responses

Attach or detach MS to the GPRS/packet domain/packet domain service

AT+CGATT=[<state>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGATT? +CGATT: <state>

Page 72: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 72 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGATT=? +CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command) are listed under “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”. Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached. Note: The unit software is automatically hard coded to attach to a GPRS network therefore entering this command as part of the initialization sequence is not required. Note: This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the execution/set and test forms.

Defined values: <state> Description

0 Detached

1 Attached

8.4 AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class

Description Syntax Possible Responses

Set class AT+CGCLASS=<class> OK

ERROR

Read current class AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: <class>

ERROR

Test if the command is

AT+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS: (list of supported

Page 73: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 73 of 272

Description Syntax Possible Responses supported <class>s) Description:

The set command is used to set the specified GPRS/Packet Domain mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. The read command returns the current mode of operation set by the TE, independent of serving cell capability and serving cell Access Technology. If no value has been set by the TE previously, the return value shall be the highest mode of operation that can be supported. The test command returns the supported <class>s.

Defined values: <class> Description

A Class A (GPRS) or PS/CS mode (UMTS)

B Class B (value does not apply to UMTS)

CG Class C packet only (GPRS) or PS mode (UMTS)

CC Class C CS only (GPRS) or CS mode (UMTS)

8.5 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State

Description Command Possible Responses

Establish GPRS/packet domain connection

AT+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid[,cid>[,…]]]]

CONNECT

ERROR

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

The execution command causes the ME to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more GPRS/Packet Domain PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS/Packet Domain attach and one or more PDP context activations. If the <L2P> parameter value is unacceptable to the ME, the ME returns an ERROR or +CME ERROR response. Otherwise, the ME issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data

Page 74: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 74 of 272

state. Commands following +CGDATA command in the AT command line are not processed by the ME. During each PDP startup procedure the ME may have access to some or all of the following information - · The command may have provided an <L2P> parameter value. · The TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the ME during in the PDP startup procedure. If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail. Any PDP type and/or PDP address present in the above information are compared with the PDP type and/or PDP address in any context definitions specified in the command in the order in which their <cid>s appear. For a context definition to match - · The PDP type must match exactly. · The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if either or both addresses are unspecified. For example, a PPP NCP request specifying PDP type = IP and no PDP address would cause the ME to search through the specified context definitions for one with PDP type = IP and any PDP address. The context shall be activated using the matched value for PDP type and a static PDP address if available, together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. If a static PDP address is not available then a dynamic address is requested. If no <cid> is given or if there is no matching context definition, the ME shall attempt to activate the context with whatever information is available to the ME. The other context parameters shall be set to their default values. If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed. After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the ME returns the final result code OK. In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to start up, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the ME returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported.

Defined values: <L2P> Description

PPP Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP

<cid> Description

Integer type See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

8.6 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context

Page 75: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 75 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Select PDP context parameters

AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type>[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp> [,<h_comp> [,<pd1> [,...[,pdN]]]]]]]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the command

AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>, <PDP_addr>,<d_comp>, <h_comp>[,<pd1>[,...[,pdN>]]]

[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>, <PDP_addr>,<d_comp>, <h_comp>[,<pd1>[,...[,pdN>]]]

[…]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s), (list of supported <h_comp>s) [,(list of supported <pd1>s) [,…[,(list of supported <pdN>s)]]] [<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,,, (list of supported <d_comp>s), (list of supported <h_comp>s) […]]

OK

Page 76: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 76 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

ERROR Description:

Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. If the parameter list is empty, the table will be cleared. If just the <cid> is specified then that entry will be cleared but the rest of the table will stay intact. PDP context table entries may only be cleared if the context is not activated. When the PDP context is activated a dynamic IP address will be filled into the table entry by the network. If the network supports it, then a static IP address may be filled in and will be used when activating the context. When the context is deactivated the IP address will be removed from the table if it is a dynamic IP but a static IP will remain.

Defined values: <cid> Description

Integer type

(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the test form of the command

1-10 Supported values

<PDP_type> Description

IP Internet Protocol, version 4 (IETF STD 5) (Default)

IPV6 Internet Protocol, version 6 (IETF RFC 2460)

<APN> Description

String type

(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested

<PDP_addr> Description

String type

A string parameter that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the

Page 77: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 77 of 272

<PDP_addr> Description TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested

<d_comp> Description

0 PDP data compression OFF (Default)

1 PDP data compression ON

2 V.42bis

<h_comp> Description

0 PDP header compression OFF (Default)

1 PDP header compression ON

2...255 Reserved

<PdN> Description

String type

Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific to the <PDP_type> Not supported

8.7 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context

Description Command Possible Responses

Select secondary PDP context parameters

AT+CGDSCONT=[<cid>,<p_cid> [,<PDP_type> [,<d_comp> [,<h_comp>]]]]

OK

ERROR

Read the command

AT+CGDSCONT? +CGDSCONT: <cid>, <p_cid>,<d_comp>, <h_comp>

[<CR><LF>+CGDSCONT: <cid>, <p_cid>,<d_comp>, <h_comp>

[…]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the AT+CGDSCONT=? +CGDSCONT: (range

Page 78: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 78 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses command is supported

of supported <cid>s), (list of <cid>s for active primary contexts),(list of supported <PDP_type>s), (list of supported <d_comp>s), (list of supported <h_comp>s) OK

ERROR Description:

The set command specifies PDP context parameter values for a Secondary PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The number of PDP contexts that may be in a defined state at the same time is given by the range returned by the test command. A special form of the set command, +CGDSCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to become undefined. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. Note: If <cid> states an already existing, primary context, this will be converted to a secondary one, provided of course, that stated <p_cid> is a different and existing primary account defined with +CGDCONT. Note that any secondary contexts attached to the converted context disappears.

Defined values: <cid> Description

Integer type

(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the test form of the command

1-20 Supported values

<p_cid> Description

Integer type

(Primary PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition which

Page 79: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 79 of 272

<p_cid> Description has been specified by use of the +CGDCONT command. The parameter is local to the TE-ME interface.

<PDP_type> Description

"IP" Internet Protocol (IP Version 4)

"IPV6" Internet Protocol (IP Version 6)

<d_comp> Description

0 PDP data compression OFF (Default)

1 PDP data compression ON

2 V.42bis

<h_comp> Description

0 PDP header compression OFF (Default)

1 PDP header compression ON

2...255 Reserved

8.8 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting

Description Command Possible Responses

Set command

AT+CGEREP=[<mode> [,<bfr>]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the command

AT+CGEREP? +CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGEREP=? +CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Page 80: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 80 of 272

Enables or disables GPRS event reporting via unsolicted result codes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered. See +CGEV for a description of the unsolicited response format.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT. No codes are forwarded to the TE. If MT result code buffer is full, the oldest ones can be discarded.

1 Discard unsolicited result codes when MT-TE link is reserved (e.g. in onlne data mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE. (online data mode indication is currently not available, therefore link is assuemed to be not reserved)

<bfr> Description

0 MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered

8.8.1 +CGEV GPRS Event Reporting Description:

The +CGEV unsolicited messages are enabled or disabled by the AT+CGEREP command. The format of the unsolicited report is: +CGEV: <XXX>

Defined values: <XXX> Description

+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]

The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known.

+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]

The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known.

+CGEV: NW DETACH The network has forced a GPRS/Packet Domain detach. This implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately

+CGEV: ME DETACH The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS/Packet Domain detach. This

Page 81: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 81 of 272

<XXX> Description implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately

<PDP_addr> Description

String type

A string parameter that identifies the module in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested

<PDP_type> Description

IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<cid> Description

Integer type See AT+CGDCONT command for range

8.9 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address

Description Command Possible Responses

Show PDP addresses for specified CIDs

AT+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid> [,…]]]

+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr> [<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr> [...]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s. An IP address is only assigned to a PDP context if the context is activated (see +CGACT) or if the IP address has been staticly assigned by the user via +CGDCONT.

Defined values:

Page 82: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 82 of 272

<cid>

Description

Integer type

Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned

<PDP_address> Description

String type A string that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available

8.10 AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

Description Command Possible Response(s)

set a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter

AT+CGEQMIN=[<cid> [,<Traffic class> [,<Maximum bitrate UL> [,<Maximum bitrate DL> [,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> [,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> [,<Delivery order> [,<Maximum SDU size> [,<SDU error ratio> [,<Residual bit error ratio> [,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> [,<Transfer delay> [,<Traffic handling priority>]]]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+CGEQMIN? +CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum

Page 83: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 83 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority>

[<CR><LF>

+CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>

Page 84: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 84 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority>

[…]]

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGEQMIN=? +CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s) ,(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous

Page 85: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 85 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s)

[<CR><LF>

+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s) ,(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL >s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL >s) ,(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s)

Page 86: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 86 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) ,(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s)

[…]] Description

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and checked against the negotiated profile only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +GGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQMIN command is effectively an extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGEQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to be returned to the default values. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. The parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. The QoS profiles for PDP contexts are part of the configuration profile. The default setting for every PDP context is an empty QoS profile. Executing AT&F restores the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to the empty profile. To commit the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed.

Defined values <cid> Description

See AT+CGDCONT for range of <cid>.

Page 87: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 87 of 272

<cid> Description

NOTE: is is not necessary to define a <cid> value using +CGDCONT before setting the QoS values using this command.

The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 -

<Traffic class>

Description

Integer format

A numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised.

0 Conversational

1 Streaming

2 Interactive

3 Background (Default)

<Maximum bitrate UL> Description

Integer Maximum number of kbit/s delivered to UMTS. Ericsson Specific note: With reference to 3GPP TS 24.008 subclause 10.5.6.5, not all the integer values are valid. Thus upon setting this parameter, the value is rounded down to the nearest valid value. It then follows that reading back this parameter may produce a different value than that used upon setting.

0...384 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<Maximum bitrate DL> Description

Integer Maximum number of kbit/s delivered by UMTS. See note under <Maximum bitrate UL>

0...3648 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

Page 88: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 88 of 272

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>

Description

Integer A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). See note under <Maximum bitrate UL>

0...384 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>

Description

Integer A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). See note under <Maximum bitrate UL>

0...3648 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<Delivery order>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.

0 No

1 Yes

<Maximum SDU size>

Description

Integer Indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets Note: With reference to 3GPP TS 24.008 subclause 10.5.6.5, not all the integer values are valid. The general rule is then that the integer will be rounded down to the nearest valid value. It is therefore possible to read out a value other than that given.

0...1502 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

Page 89: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 89 of 272

<SDU error ratio>

Description

String Indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=…,”5E3”,…).

<Residual bit error ratio>

Description

String Indicates the target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=…,”5E3”,…)

<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>

Description

Integer Type A numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not.

0 No

1 Yes

2 No detection or erroneous SDUs (Default)

<Transfer delay>

Description

Integer The targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds.

0...254 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

Page 90: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 90 of 272

<Traffic handling priority>

Description

Integer Specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.

0...3 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<PDP_type> Description

String See +CGDCONT command If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified.

8.11 AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)

Description Command Possible Response(s)

Retrieves the negotiated QoS profiles

+CGEQNEG =[<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]

+CGEQNEG: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>, <Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority>

[<CR><LF>

+CGEQNEG: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>, <Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error

Page 91: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 91 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority>

[…]]

Test if the command is supported

+CGEQNEG=? +CGEQNEG: (list of <cid>s associated with active contexts)

Description This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message. The execution command returns the negotiated QoS profile for the specified context identifiers, <cid>s. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may have a separate value. The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.

Defined values <cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 [46] -

<Traffic class>

Description

Integer format

A numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised.

0 Conversational

1 Streaming

2 Interactive

3 Background

Other values are reserved.

<Maximum bitrate UL>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,32, …).

Page 92: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 92 of 272

<Maximum bitrate DL>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,32, …).

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>

Description

Integer Type

Anumeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,32, …).

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>

Description

Integer Type

Anumeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,32, …).

<Delivery order>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.

0 No

1 Yes

Other values are reserved.

<Maximum SDU size>

Description

Integer Type

0...1502

A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets.

Page 93: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 93 of 272

<SDU error ratio>

Description

String Type

A string parameter that indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,”5E3”,…).

<Residual bit error ratio>

Description

String Type

A string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:…,”5E3”,…).

<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>

Description

Integer Type A numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not.

0 No

1 Yes

2 No detection of erroneous SDUs

Other values are reserved.

<Transfer delay>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter (0,1,2,…) that indicates the targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds.

Page 94: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 94 of 272

<Traffic handling priority>

Description

Integer Type a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that specifies the relative importance for handling of all

SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.

If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified.

8.12 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

Description Command Possible Response(s)

Specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile

+CGEQREQ=[<cid> [,<Traffic class> [,<Maximum bitrate UL> [,<Maximum bitrate DL> [,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> [,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> [,<Delivery order> [,<Maximum SDU size> [,<SDU error ratio> [,<Residual bit error ratio> [,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> [,<Transfer delay> [,<Traffic handling priority> ]]]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

+CGEQREQ? +CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling

Page 95: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 95 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) priority>

[<CR><LF>

+CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority>

[…]]

Test if the command is supported

+CGEQREQ=? +CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU

Page 96: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 96 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s)

[<CR><LF>

+CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling

Page 97: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 97 of 272

Description Command Possible Response(s) priority>s)

[…]] Description

This command allows the TE to specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and sent to the network only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGEQREQ command is effectively an extension to this command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGEQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to reset to the default QoS values.. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. The QoS profiles for PDP contexts are part of the configuration profile. The default setting for every PDP context is an empty QoS profile. Executing AT&F restores the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to the empty profile. To commit the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed.

Defined values <cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 -

<Traffic class>

Description

Integer format

A numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised.

0 Conversational

1 Streaming

2 Interactive

3 Background

Other values are reserved.

Page 98: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 98 of 272

If the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming, then the Guaranteed and Maximum bitrate parameters should also be provided. Other values are reserved.

<Maximum bitrate UL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example, a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Maximum bitrate DL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Guaranteed bitrate UL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Guaranteed bitrate DL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming.

<Delivery order>

Description

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.

Integer Type

A numeric parameter that indicates whether the GPRS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.

0 No

1 Yes

Other values are reserved.

Page 99: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 99 of 272

<Maximum SDU size>: A numeric parameter (1, 2, 3, …) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <SDU error ratio>: A string parameter that indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,"5E3",...). '0E0' means subscribed value. <Residual bit error ratio>: A string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,"5E3",...). '0E0' means subscribed value. <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>: A numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not.

0 no 1 yes 2 no detect 3 subscribed value

Other values are reserved. <Transfer delay>: A numeric parameter (0, 1, 2, …) that indicates the targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <Traffic handling priority>: A numeric parameter (1, 2, 3, …) that specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT command). If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified.

8.13 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)

Description Command Possible Responses

Set minimum acceptable

AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> [,<precedence> [,<delay>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Page 100: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 100 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses profile [,<reliability>

[,<peak> [,<mean>]]]]]]

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s)[…]]

OK

ERROR Description:

Note that this command is present for compatibility only. This command is a dummy only and the +CGEQMIN command must be used instead.

8.14 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

Page 101: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 101 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Set quality of service profile

AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence> [,<delay> [,<reliability> [,<peak> [,<mean>]]]]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s), (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s) [<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s), (list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s)[…]]

OK

ERROR Description:

Note that this command is present for compatibility only. This command is a dummy only and the +CGEQREQ command must be used.

8.15 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status

Page 102: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 102 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Set command AT+CGREG=[<n>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGREG? +CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported.

AT+CGREG=? +CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

ERROR

Unsolicited response if reporting is enabled

+CGREG: <stat>

+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

Description:

Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME. Location information elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered in the network. Note: If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the +CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration status and location information for circuit switched services.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. Default value.

1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code

2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code

Page 103: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 103 of 272

<stat> Description

0 Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to register with

1 Registered, home network

2 Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to register with

3 Registration denied

4 Unknown

5 Registered, roaming

<lac> Description

String type

Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> Description

String type

Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. For GSM cells, the first two bytes will be zeros.

Example: AT+CGREG=1 OK AT+CGREG? +CGREG: 0,2 OK AT+CGATT=1 OK +CGREG=1

8.15.1 +CGREG GPRS Network Unsolicited Response Description:

The ouput format is +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1. The unsolicited response is output when there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network registration status of the MS. This can happen when the user manually attaches or detaches to/from the GPRS network (using +CGATT or +CGACT). The module is considered registered to the network when the device is attached and it is not registered when the module is detached from the GPRS network.

Page 104: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 104 of 272

The code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] will be output when <n>=2. This event happens when there is a change of the network cell.

<stat> Description

0 Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to register with

1 Registered, home network

2 Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to register with

3 Registration denied

4 Unknown

5 Registered, roaming

<lac> Description

String type

Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> Description

String type

Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. For GSM cells, the first two bytes will be zeros.

8.16 AT+CGTFT Traffic Flow Template

Description Command Possible Responses

Allows the TE to specify a Packet Filter for a Traffic Flow Template - TFT that is used in the GGSN for routing of down-link packets onto different QoS flows

AT+CGTFT=[<cid>, [<packet filter identifier>, <evaluation precedence index> [,<source address and subnet mask> [,<protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)> [,<destination port range> [,<source port range> [,<ipsec security parameter index (spi)> [,<type of service (tos) (ipv4) and

OK

ERROR

Page 105: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 105 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses towards the TE

mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask> [,<flow label (ipv6)> ]]]]]]]]]

Query template parameters

AT+CGTFT? +CGTFT: <cid>, <packet filter identifier>, <evaluation precedence index>, <source address and subnet mask>, <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>, <destination port range>, <source port range>, <ipsec security parameter index (spi)>, <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>, <flow label (ipv6)>

[<CR><LF>+CGTFT: <cid>, <packet filter identifier>, <evaluation precedence index>, <source address and subnet mask>, <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>, <destination port range>, <source port range>, <ipsec security parameter index (spi)>, <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>, <flow label (ipv6)>

[…]]

Test if the command is

AT+CGTFT=? +CGTFT: <PDP_type>, (list of supported

Page 106: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 106 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses supported <packet filter

identifier>s), (list of supported <evaluation precedence index>s), (list of supported <source address and subnet mask>s), (list of supported <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>s), (list of supported <destination port range>s), (list of supported <source port range>s), (list of supported <ipsec security parameter index (spi)>s), (list of supported <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>s), (list of supported <flow label (ipv6)>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGTFT: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <packet filter identifier>s), (list of supported <evaluation precedence index>s), (list of supported <source address and subnet mask>s), (list of supported <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>s), (list of supported <destination port range>s), (list of supported <source port range>s), (list of supported <ipsec security parameter

Page 107: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 107 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses index (spi)>s), (list of supported <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>s), (list of supported <flow label (ipv6)>s)

[…]] Description:

This command allows the TE to specify a Packet Filter - PF for a Traffic Flow Template - TFT that is used in the GGSN for routing of down-link packets onto different QoS flows towards the TE. The concept is further described in the 3GPP TS 23.060. A TFT consists of from one and up to eight Packet Filters, each identified by a unique <packet filter identifier>. A Packet Filter also has an <evaluation precedence index> that is unique within all TFTs associated with all PDP contexts that are associated with the same PDP address. The set command specifies a Packet Filter that is to be added to the TFT stored in the MT and used for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified TFT will be stored in the GGSN only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGTFT command is effectively an extension to these commands. The Packet Filters consist of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGTFT= <cid> causes all of the Packet Filters in the TFT for context number <cid> to become undefined. At any time there may exist only one PDP context with no associated TFT amongst all PDP contexts associated to one PDP address. At an attempt to delete a TFT, which would violate this rule, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. The read command returns the current settings for all Packet Filters for each defined context. In case no filter is defined the read command will return "OK" only. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. TFTs shall be used for PDP-type IP and PPP only. For PDP-type PPP a TFT is applicable only when IP traffic is carried over PPP. If PPP carries header-compressed IP packets, then a TFT cannot be used.

Defined values:

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands).

Page 108: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 108 of 272

The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.060 - <packet filter identifier>: Numeric parameter, value range from 1 to 8. <source address and subnet mask>: Consists of dot-separated numeric (0-255) parameters on the form 'a1.a2.a3.a4.m1.m2.m3.m4', for IPv4 and 'a1.a2.a3.a4.a5.a6.a7.a8.a9.a10.a11.a12.a13.a14.a15.a16. m1.m2.m3.m4.m5.m6.m7.m8.m9.m10.m11.m12.m13.m14.m15.m16', for IPv6. <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>: Numeric parameter, value range from 0 to 255. <destination port range>: String consisting of dot-separated numeric (0-65535) parameters on the form 'f.t'. <source port range>:String consisting of dot-separated numeric (0-65535) parameters on the form 'f.t'. <ipsec security parameter index (spi)>: Hexadecimal parameter, value range from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF. <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>: Dot-separated numeric (0-255) parameters on the form 't.m'. <flow label (ipv6)>: Hexadecimal parameter, value range from 00000 to FFFFF. Valid for IPv6 only. <evaluation precedence index>: Numeric parameter, value range from 0 to 255. Some of the above listed attributes may coexist in a Packet Filter while others mutually exclude each other, the possible combinations are shown in 3GPP TS 23.060.

8.17 AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control

Description Syntax Possible responses

Control the USB Ethernet connection state

AT*ENAP=<state>,<index>

OK

ERROR

+CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting

AT*ENAP? *ENAP: <status>

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*ENAP=? *ENAP: (range of valid <state>s),(range of valid <index>es)

OK

+CME ERROR: <err> Description:

Page 109: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 109 of 272

This command is used to enable or disable the USB Ethernet Emulation communication interface, and to associate a particular PDP Context with the interface. A PDP context is referenced which must have been previously defined via the *EIAC command or the +CGDCONT command. Also, an internet account must have been previously created and defined via the *EIAC command.

Additional Information: A response of OK does not mean that a connection has been established or disconnected. This simply means that the command has been processed without any errors. To check the status of the connection, use the check connection status command. (AT*ENAP?) When executing the command to create a USB Ethernet connection, the response will be ERROR if a connection already exists. When executing the command to disconnect a USB Ethernet connection, the response will be ERROR if no connection exists.

Defined values:

<state> Description

0 Disconnect

1 Connect

<index> Description

Integer type

1-99

Equivalent to <index> in *EIAC command and also <cid> in +CGDCONT

<status> Description

0 Not connected

1 Connected

2 Connection setup in progress

8.18 AT*EUPLINK Send Uplink Data

Description Syntax Possible responses

Do Some Function

ATxxx=<parm1>[,<parm2>[,<parm3>]] List of xxx: *xxx: <parm1>, <parm2>,

Page 110: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 110 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses <parm3> [:]

+CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

ATxxx=? Range of parameters: *xxx: (0-255)

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command is used to...

Additional Information: Here is some additional information...

Defined values:

<parm1> Description

0 XXX Default value

1....255

XXX

<parm2> Description

Hex string xxx

<parm3> Description

0 xxx

1 xxx

2 xxx

3 xxx

Page 111: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 111 of 272

9 Internet Accounts

9.1 AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read the current authentication parameter settings

AT*EIAAUR=[<index>,<bearer_type>]

List of existing IA(s) authentication params *EIAAUR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <userid>,<password>,,<auth_prot>, <ask4pwd> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAAUR=? Range of parameters: *EIAAUR: (0-255),(0-4)

Description: This command reads the authentication parameters of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s).

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read Authentication parameters of ALL existing Internet Accounts. Default value

1....255 Write parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index>, see under command AT*EIAC

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers. Default value

1....4 Specific bearer. For more information on bearer types see <bearer_type> pararemer definitions under command AT*EIAC

Page 112: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 112 of 272

<bearer_type> Description

<password> Description

String type Password for access to the IP network. Max 30 8-bit characters.

<auth_prot> Description

Bit 0 None

Bit 1 PAP

Bit 2 CHAP

Bit 3 MS-CHAP

Bit 4 MS-CHAPv2

The authentication method is organised as 5 bit long field in which each bit indicates a specific authentication method. The bitmask set, represents the Authentication methods supported by the Internet Account in question (<index>, <bearer>). Default value = 00111 Note: By None it is meant that it doesn't matter what authentication method is supported by the peer

9.2 AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Define authentication parameters

AT*EIAAUW=<index>,<bearer_type>[,[<userid>][,[<password>][,[<auth_prot>][,[<ask4pwd>]]]]]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAAUW=? Range of Authentication parameters: *EIAAUW: (1-255),(1-4),(""),(""), (00001-11111),(0-1)

Description: This command specifies the authentication parameters of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s).

Page 113: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 113 of 272

Authentication parameters are used under any PPP negotiation as well as under PS network connection establishment (context activation). Note!

If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response.

Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index>, see under command AT*EIAC

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS bearer i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS bearer, NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<user_id> Description

String type Password for access to the IP network. Max 30 8-bit characters.

<auth_prot> Description

Bit 0 None

Bit 1 PAP

Bit 2 CHAP

Bit 3 MS-CHAP

Bit 4 MS-CHAPv2 The authentication method is organised as 5 bit long field in which each bit indicates a specific authentication method. The bitmask set, represents the Authentication methods supported by the Internet Account in question (<index>, <bearer>). Default value = 00111As an example, 00111, i.e. bit2,bit1 and bit0 is set to 1. Indicating the support for CHAP, PAP and None. By None is meant that it doesn't matter what authentication method is supported by the peer. The value 0 (all the bits set to 0) is not allowed. At least one bit has to be set to 1 Note: Leading 0's does not need to be stated. E.g. 111 is the same as 00111.

Page 114: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 114 of 272

9.3 AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create

Description Syntax Possible responses

Create account/define general parameters

AT*EIAC=<bearer_type>[,[<name>]]

*EIAC: <index>,<name>

Read the current setting

AT*EIAC? List of created IA's: *EIAC: <index>, <bearer_type>, <name> :

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAC=? Range of general parameters: *EIAC: (1-4),("")

Description: This command is used to define the general parameters of an Internet Account (IA). When a new account is defined it is assigned an index which is subsequently returned as an informational text response together with bearer type and name of account. When using the IA configuration command, one can not force the value of the index. The other Internet Account commands can not be used to create an account. The other AT commands have to indicate the index value of an existing Account in combination with what kind of bearer the parameters are set for. The exception is the Internet Account configuration commands where it is implicit what the bearer type is (e.g. AT*EIAPSW - write PS bearer parameters), then only index value is necessary. Note! When a PDP Context is defined via an AT command, an Internet Account is automatically created with Packet Domain Service as the bearer and it get's an index value with a one-to-one mapping to the specified <cid> parameter value of the GPRS command. If the IA with that mapping to CId value is already existing, the specific parameters of that IA is overwritten (also when IA parameters are originally specified for another bearer than PS). In the same way a PDP Context with the default values set is defined when an IA is created with Packet Domain Service as the bearer, using the AT*EIAC command. The <cid> of the PDP context will have a one-to-one mapping with the PS bearer IA's index. Note! If user does not specify any bearer type, the command results in an error response. Note! If user does not specify a name of the account, an autogenerated name will be added to the account. Note! The temporary or locked type of accounts are reserved for internal

Page 115: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 115 of 272

applications use and not listed in the read command, nor possible to create using this command. Defined values:

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<name> Description

String type Each Internet Account has a ”friendly” name. Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20 characters

<index> Description

1....255 Index of an account within the specific bearer type. There might be several accounts that has the same index value, but only one account within a given bearer type. So it is the combination of bearer type and index that forms the unique reference to one specific Internet Account.

9.4 AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read CSD parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIACSR=[<index>]

List of IA's with CSD parameters: *EIACS: <index>, <dialout_nbr>, <dial_type>, <data_rate>, <data_compr> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is

AT*EIACSR=? Range of parameters: *EIACSR: (0-255)

Page 116: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 116 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses supported Description:

This command is used to read the CS bearer parameters of one (or all) CS bearer Internet Account(s).

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read CSD bearer parameters of ALL CSD bearer Internet Accounts. If no CS bearer IA's exists, only OK is submitted. Default value

1....255 Read CSD bearer parameters of the specified Internet Account. For range and more details on <index>, see under *EIAC command.

<dialout_nbr> Description

String type ISP phone number for internal dial out application to call

<dial_type> Description

0 Analogue modem. Default value

1 ISDN modem.

<data_rate> Description

1 9600 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 9600

2 14400 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 14400

3 19200 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 9600

4 28800 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 14400 (or 3 TS*9600) Default value

5 38400 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 9600 Not supported

6 43200 kbps, GSM: 3 time slots * 14400

7 57600 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 14400

Page 117: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 117 of 272

<data_compr> Description

0 V42bis data compression off.

1 V42bis data compression on. Default value

Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.5 AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities

Description Syntax Possible responses

Define CSD parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIACSW=<index>[,[<dialout_nbr>][,[<dial_type>][,[<data_rate>][,[<data_compr>]]]]]

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIACSW=? Range of CS parameters: *EIACSW: (1-255),(""),(0,1),(1-7),(0-1)

Description: This command is used to define the CS bearer parameters of one (or all) CS bearer Internet Account(s). Note! CS bearer IA's can only be used for internal applications only, to dial out to an ISP providing IP network access (e.g. for WAP over CS). Normal CS "modem style" dial-up networking and plain CS modem connections are done by TE issuing the "legacy" AT commands as specified by . The parameters for such calls (RLP parameters, V42bis parameters, HSCSD parameters, etc.) are only stored in volatile memory, if not stored by using &W command. Note! If the user do not specify the parameters <Index>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255

Write CSD bearer parameters of the specified Internet Account.

Page 118: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 118 of 272

<index> Description For range and more details on <index>, see under *EIAC command.

<dialout_nbr> Description

String type ISP phone number for internal dial out application to call

<dial_type> Description

0 Analogue modem. Default value

1 ISDN modem.

<data_rate> Description

1 9600 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 9600

2 14400 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 14400

3 19200 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 9600

4 28800 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 14400 (or 3 TS*9600) Default value

5 38400 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 9600 Not supported

6 43200 kbps, GSM: 3 time slots * 14400

7 57600 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 14400

<data_compr> Description

0 V42bis data compression off.

1 V42bis data compression on. Default value

Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.6 AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete

Description Syntax Possible responses

Delete AT*EIAD=<index>,<bearer_type>

Page 119: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 119 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses

account

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAD=? Range of parameters: *EIAD: (0-255),(0-4)

Description: Action command used to delete one specific (or all) existing Internet Account(s). The other Internet Account commands (or GPRS AT commands) can not be used to delete an account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response.

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Delete ALL existing <bearer_type> Internet Accounts

1....255 Delete Internet Account with index as specified, and bearer type as specified. For ranges and more details on <index> see under *EIAC command.

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers

1....4 Specific bearer. see definition of <bearer_type> under command *EIAC.

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

9.7 AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read LCP parameters

AT*EIALCPR=[<index>, List of IA's with their LCP parameters:

Page 120: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 120 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses of Internet Account

<bearer_type>] *EIALCPR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <accm>,<mru>,<pfc>,<acfc>,<keep_alive>, <allowed_ncp> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIALCPR=? Range of LCP parameters: *EIALCPR: (0-255),(0-4)

Description: This command is used to read the PPP LCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Account(s).

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read LCP parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value

1....255 Read LCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on index, see under command *EIAC

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types.

1....255 Specific bearers. See definitions on <bearers> under command *EIAC

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

Page 121: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 121 of 272

<accm> Description

0-FFFFFFFF Asynchronous Control Character Map value, as a hexadecimal value. Default is: 0

<mru> Description

1-1500

Max Receive Unit. The value specified is the recommended, but any MRU between this specified value and 1500 will be accepted.

<pfc> Description

0 00 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

1 01 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

2 10 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

3 11 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted. Default value

<acfc> Description

0 00 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

1 01 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested.

Page 122: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 122 of 272

<acfc> Description Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

2 10 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

3 11 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

Default value

<keep_alive> Description

0 LCP keepalive messages should not be sent Default value

1 LCP keepalive messages should be sent

<allowed_ncp> Description

0 Not supported

1 Network Control Protocol IPCP allowed. (bit0) Default value

2 Network Control Protocol IPv6CP allowed (bit 1)

3 Both network control protocols allowed (bit 0, bit 1)

9.8 AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP

Description Syntax Possible responses

Define LCP parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIALCPW=<index>,<bearer_type>[,[<accm>][,[<mru>][,[<pfc>][,[<acfc>][,[<keep_alive>][,[<allowed_ncp>]]]]]]]

...

Read the current

Not applicable

Page 123: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 123 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses

setting

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIALCPW=? Range of LCP parameters: *EIALCPW: (1-255),(1-4),(0-ffffffff), (0-1500),(0-16),(0-16), (0-1),(0-3)

Description: Action command used to define the PPP LCP parameters of an Internet Account (IA). This Internet Account command can not be used to create an account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write LCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on index, see under command *EIAC

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

3 Bluetooth Bearer, i.e. to connect with remote Bluetooth LAN device

4 External Interface. Test value, for "dial-in" use

<accm> Description

0-FFFFFFFF

Asynchronous Control Character Map value, as a hexadecimal value. Default is: 0

Page 124: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 124 of 272

<mru> Description

1-1500

Max Receive Unit. The value specified is the recommended, but any MRU between this specified value and 1500 will be accepted.

<pfc> Description

0 00 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

1 01 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

2 10 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

3 11 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted. Default value

<acfc> Description

0 00 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

1 01 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

2 10 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested.

Page 125: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 125 of 272

<acfc> Description Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

3 11 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be accepted. Default value

<keep_alive> Description

0 LCP keepalive messages should not be sent Default value

1 LCP keepalive messages should be sent

<allowed_ncp> Description

0 Not supported

1 Network Control Protocol IPCP allowed. (bit0) Default value

2 Network Control Protocol IPv6CP allowed (bit 1)

3 Both network control protocols allowed (bit 0, bit 1)

9.9 AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read link-socket parameters

AT*EIALSR=[<index>,<bearer_type>]

List of existing IA(s) link-socket params *EIALSR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <link_socket> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if

AT*EIALSR=? Range of parameters: *EIALSR: (1-

Page 126: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 126 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses the command is supported

255),(1-4),(0-1)

Description: Action command that reads the status of the link socket parameter of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s).

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read status of the <link_ socket> parameter of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts.

1....255 Read general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<link_socket> Description

0 Disable link socket. Default value

1 Enable link socket.

9.10 AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Enable/disable link socket.

AT*EIALSW=<index>,<bearer_type>[,[<link_socket>]]

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to

AT*EIALSW=? Range of parameters:

Page 127: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 127 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses

show if the command is supported

*EIALSW: (1-255),(1-4),(0-1)

Description: Action command that enables or disables the link socket. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<link_socket> Description

0 Disable link socket. Default value

1 Enable link socket.

9.11 AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read IPCP parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIAIPCPR=[<index>,<bearer_type>]

List of IA's with PPP IPCP parameters: *EIAIPCPR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <own_IP_addr>, <prim_DNS_addr>, <sec_dns_addr>, <header_compr>

Page 128: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 128 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAIPCPR=? Range of parameters: *EIAIPCPR: (0-255),(0-4)

Description: This command reads out the IPCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Accounts

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read IPCP parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value

1....255 Read IPCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers. Default value

Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types.

1....4 Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<ip_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 host address ME's own IP address. Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

Page 129: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 129 of 272

<prim_dns_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 primary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<sec_dns_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 secondary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<header_compr> Description

0? Header compression off Default value Or various protocol numbers for different types of header compression?

1? Header compression on

9.12 AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP

Description Syntax Possible responses

Define IPCP parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIAIPCPW=<index>,<bearer_type>[,[< ip_addr>][,[<prim_dns_addr>][,[<sec_dns_addr>][,[<header_compr>]]]]]

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAIPCPW=? Range of PPP IPCP parameters: *EIAIPCPW: (1-255)(1-4),(""),(""), (""),(0-1)

Description:

Page 130: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 130 of 272

Action command that specifies the PPP IPCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Accounts. The command is used to specify the IP addresses to be used, both under PPP negotiations as well as under PS network connection establishment (context activation). If "0" values are given necessary parameters are requested to be genereated dynamically by the network one attaches to. If specific values are set, it means requesting for static IP addresses to be used. Note! Values stored here are not the ones used when doing PS dial-up connection from external application (TE), since TE in this case has it's own IP addresses to negotiate with the network (what TE sends is forwarded by ME's PPP proxy to network). Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Note! PPP parameters are relevant for all bearer types, but mostly for internal calls. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write IPCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.

<ip_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 host address ME's own IP address. Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<prim_dns_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 primary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0.0, which means

Page 131: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 131 of 272

<prim_dns_addr> Description request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<sec_dns_addr> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 secondary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<header_compr> Description

0? Header compression off Default value

Or various protocol numbers for different types of header compression?

1? Header compression on

9.13 AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Write PSD parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIAPSW=<index>[,[<pref_serv>][,[<apn>] [,[<traffic_class>][,[<header_compr>][,[<data_compr>]]]]]]

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAPSW=? Range of PS parameters: *EIAPSW: (1-255),(0-1),(""),(0-4), (0-1),(0-1)

Description: Action command used to specify PS specific parameters of one (or all) PS bearer Internet Account. This command is used to define the most relevant Packet Switched (PS) data connection parameters. Note that all PS parameters of this command

Page 132: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 132 of 272

except <pref_serv> can also be configured using the normal R'99 GPRS commands, see [7] (plus a lot more PS parameters). Note! For PS bearers, the <index> maps to the <ContextId> used in the GPRS commands. Note! If the user do not specify the parameter <Index>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write packet switched bearer parameters of Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

<pref_serv> Description

0 Preferred service - Packet Switched only Means that an incoming call will be denied when running PS connection(s), if there are not system resources to serve both.

1 Preferred service - Automatic Default value

Means that an incoming call will put GPRS or UMTS packet switched connection(s) on hold if there are not system resources to serve both.

<apn> Description

String type APN

<traffic_class> Description

0 Conversational. Gives best effort

1 Streaming For e.g. Voice over IP and other QoS (delay) critical applications

2 Interactive For e.g. Video/Audio over IP and other QoS (delay+data volume) critical applications.

3 Background For e.g. Chat and applications with some time requirements and low-medium data volume.

4 Subscribed value Default value

For non-time critical applications

Page 133: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 133 of 272

<header_compr> Description

0 Header compression off. Default value

1 Header compression on. RFC 1144 (Van Jacobson) or RFC 2507 depending on UMTS or GSM network.

<data_compr> Description

0 Data compression off. Default value

1 Data compression on. Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.14 AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read PS parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIAPSR=[<index>] List of IA's with PS parameters: *EIAPSR: <index>, <pref_serv>,<apn>, <traffic_class>, <header_compr>, <data_compr> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAPSR=? Range of PS parameters: *EIAPSR: (0-255)

Description: Action command that reads the wanted Packet Switched (PS) parameters from one (or all) primary PS bearer Internet Account(s).

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read packet switched bearer parameters of ALL existing PS bearer Internet Accounts.

Page 134: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 134 of 272

<index> Description If no PS bearer IA's exists, only OK is submitted. Default value

1....255 Read packet switched bearer parameters of Internet Account with Index as specified. For range and more details on <index> see under command *EIAC

<pref_serv> Description

0 Preferred service - Packet Switched only Means that an incoming call will be denied when running PS connection(s), if there are not system resources to serve both.

1 Preferred service - Automatic Default value

Means that an incoming call will put GPRS or UMTS packet switched connection(s) on hold if there are not system resources to serve both.

<apn> Description

String type APN

<traffic_class> Description

0 Conversational. Gives best effort

1 Streaming For e.g. Voice over IP and other QoS (delay) critical applications

2 Interactive For e.g. Video/Audio over IP and other QoS (delay+data volume) critical applications.

3 Background For e.g. Chat and applications with some time requirements and low-medium data volume.

4 Subscribed value Default value

For non-time critical applications

<header_compr> Description

0 Header compression off. Default value

Page 135: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 135 of 272

<header_compr> Description

1 Header compression on. RFC 1144 (Van Jacobson) or RFC 2507 depending on UMTS or GSM network.

<data_compr> Description

0 Data compression off. Default value

1 Data compression on. Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.15 AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read the current authentication parameter settings

AT*EIAR=[<index>][,[<bearer_type>]]

List of existing IA(s) authentication params *EIAR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <name> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAR=? Range of general parameters: *EIAR: (0-255),(0-4)

Description: This command reads out the general parameters of one or several Internet Accounts. Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa. Defined values:

Page 136: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 136 of 272

<index> Description

0 Read general parameters of ALL existing <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value

1....255 Read general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with given index.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers Default value Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types.

1....4 Specific bearer. See definitions on <bearer_type> under command *EIAC

<name> Description

String type

Each Internet Account has a ”friendly” name. Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20 characters

9.16 AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Define authentication parameters

AT*EIAW=<index>,<bearer_type>[,[<name>]]

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAW=? Range of parameters: *EIAW: (1-255),(1-4),("")

Description: Action comamnd that specifies the general parameters of the Internet Account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response.

Page 137: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 137 of 272

Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<name> Description

String type

Each Internet Account has a ”friendly” name. Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20 characters

9.17 AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read Routing table parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIARUTR= [<index>,<bearer_type>]

List of IA's with their Routing table parameters: *EIARUTR: <index>, <bearer_type>, <IP-version>, <prefix>, <destination_address>,<nexthop_address> [:]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIARUTR=? Range of Routing table parameters: *EIARUTR: (1-255),(0-4),(""), (0-32/0-128),(""),("")

Page 138: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 138 of 272

Description: This command reads the Routing table parameters of one Internet Account.

Defined values:

<index> Description

0 Read Routing table parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value

1....255 Read Routing table parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> Description

0 All bearers Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types.

1....4 Specific bearer. See bearer definitions under the *EIAC command

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

<prefix> Description

(0....32)

IPv4: Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates how many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask. 0 indicates default route. A value of 24 will result in the following subnet mask: 255.255.255.0.

<IP_version> Description

String format "IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> Description

String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next.

Page 139: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 139 of 272

<nexthop_address> Description Not utilized for point-to-point connections

9.18 AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Set Routing table parameters of Internet Account

AT*EIARUTW= <index>,<bearer_type>,<IP-version>,<prefix>,<destination_address>,<nexthop_address>

...

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIARUTW=? Range of Routing table parameters: *EIARUTW: (1-255),(1-4),(""),(0-1), (0-32 / 0-128),(""),("")

Description: This command specifies one row of parameters in the Routing table of one Internet Account. All parameters <IP-version>,<prefix>,<destination_address>,<nexthop_address> must be given regardless if only one parameter is to be set. Note! For IPv6 addresses, the notation :: can be used, but only once. e.g. Dest addr. FFFF:FFFF:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 can be written like FFFF:FFFF::1 Note! If the user do not specify all parameters, the command results in an error response Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Write Routing table parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

Page 140: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 140 of 272

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

<prefix> Description

(0....32) IPv4: Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates how many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask. 0 indicates default route. A value of 24 will result in the following subnet mask: 255.255.255.0.

<IP_version> Description

String format "IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> Description

String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next. Not utilized for point-to-point connections

9.19 AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Delete Routing table parameters

AT*EIARUTD= <index>,<bearer_type>[,<IP-version>,<prefix>,<destination_a

...

Page 141: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 141 of 272

Description Syntax Possible responses

of Internet Account

ddress>,<nexthop_address>]

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIARUTD=? Range of Routing table parameters: *EIARUTW: (1-255),(1-4),(""),(0-1), (0-32 / 0-128),(""),("")

Description: This command deletes the Routing table parameters of one Internet Account. All parameters <IP-version>,<prefix>,<destination_address>,<nexthop_address> must be given to delete one row in the specified routing table. Note! For IPv6 addresses, the notation :: can be used, but only once. e.g. Dest addr. FFFF:FFFF:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 can be written like FFFF:FFFF::1 Note! If the user specify <index> and <bearer_type> parameters only, all defined IPv4 and IPv6 routes will be removed. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:

<index> Description

1....255 Delete parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> Description

1 PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network.

2 CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

Page 142: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 142 of 272

<prefix> Description

(0....32) IPv4: Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates how many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask. 0 indicates default route. A value of 24 will result in the following subnet mask: 255.255.255.0.

<IP_version> Description

String format "IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> Description

String of format "a.b.c.d"

IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> Description

String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next. Not utilized for point-to-point connections

Page 143: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 143 of 272

10 Identification

10.1 AT Attention Command

Description CommandPossible Responses

Checks the communication between the MS and application

AT OK

+CME ERROR <err>

Description: This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.

10.2 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification

Description Command Possible Responses

Request manufacturer identification

AT+CGMI <manufacturer>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGMI=? OK

ERROR Description:

Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <manufacturer>.

Defined values: <manufacturer> Description

Sony Ericsson This company’s name is displayed. Example:

AT+CGMI Sony Ericsson OK

10.3 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification

Description Command Possible Responses

Request the model identification

AT+CGMM <model>

+CME ERROR:

Page 144: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 144 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGMM=? OK

ERROR Description:

Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>, determined by the MS manufacturer.

Defined values: <model> Description

String type Model name for the transceiver unit Example:

AT+CGMM PC300 OK

10.4 AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification

Description Command Possible Responses

Request revision identification string

AT+CGMR <revision>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGMR=? OK

ERROR Description:

This command causes the module to return a string containing information about the software revision. Also implemented as AT+GMR.

Defined values: <revision> Description

String type An ASCII string containing the software revision Example:

AT+CGMR R1A017 OK

10.5 AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification

Page 145: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 145 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Request product serial number

AT+CGSN <sn>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGSN=?

OK

ERROR Description:

This command causes the module to return the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.

Example: AT+CGSN 004601013266310 OK

10.6 AT+GCAP Capabilities

Description Syntax Possible responses

Request complete capability list

AT+GCAP

+GCAP: +CGSM, +DS

OK Description:

This command returns the module’s capabilities. Defined values: Capabilities Description

+CGSM Support for GSM commands

+DS Support for V.42bis compression Example: AT+GCAP +GCAP: +CGSM, +DS OK

10.7 AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read manufacturer’s name

AT+GMI <manufacturer>

OK Description:

This command returns the name of the manufacturer. Equivalent to +CGMI

Defined values:

Page 146: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 146 of 272

Parameters Description

<manufacturer>

Sony Ericsson The name of the manufacturer. Example: AT+GMI Sony Ericsson OK

10.8 AT+GMM Request Model Identification

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read the model identification

AT+GMM <model>

OK Description:

This command returns the identification of the specific module model. Equivalent to +CGMM

Defined values: Parameter Description

<model>

String type Model name for the transceiver unit Example: AT+GMM PC300 OK

10.9 AT+GMR Revision Identification

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read software revision identification.

AT+GMR <revision>

OK Description:

This command returns the software revision. Equivalent to +CGMR

Defined values: Parameters Description

<revision>

String 6 characters

Page 147: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 147 of 272

Example: AT+GMR R1A001 OK

10.10 ATI Identification Information

Description Command Possible Responses

Read identification information ATI[<value>] <information>

Test if the command is supported and which optional information types

ATI=? I: (0,1,3,5,7,9)

Description: This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text, followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown in the table below.

Defined values: <value> Description

0 Model identification. Equivalent to +GMM

1 Software revision. Equivalent to +GMR

3 Modem manufacturer name

5 Listing of active settings

7 Modem Configuration Profile, i.e. brief listing of the modem functionality: Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type etc.

9 PnP (Plug n Play) identification Examples:

ATI0 PC300 OK ATI1 R1A001 OK ATI3 Sony Ericsson OK ATI=5 Configuration Settings on Channel 1 &C: 1 &D: 2

Page 148: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 148 of 272

*EIAC: 1,1,"PS Account 1" *ELIN: 1 +CBST: 0,0,1 +CDIP: 0,0 +CGACT: 1,0 +CGATT: 1 +CGDCONT: 1,"IP","isp.internet","0.0.0.0",0,0 +CGEQMIN: 1,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,"0E0","0E0",2,0,0 +CGEQREQ: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"1E4","1E5",0,0,0 +CGEREP: 0,0 +CGQMIN: 1,0,0,0,0,0 +CGQREQ: 1,0,0,3,0,0 +CHSN: 0,1,0,4 +CHSR: 0 +CHSU: 0 +CMEE: 1 +CMUX: 0,0,1,31,10,3,30,10,2 +CR: 0 +CRC: 0 +CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0 +CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3 +CSCS: "GSM" +CV120: 1,1,1,0,0,0 +CVHU: 0 +DR: 0 +DS: 3,0,1024,32 +ICF: 3,3 +IFC: 2,2 +ILRR: 0 +IPR: 115200 E: 1 M: 0 Q: 0 S0: 000 S10: 002 S2: 128 S3: 013 S4: 010 S5: 008 S6: 002 S7: 050 S8: 002 V: 1 X: 4 OK ATI7 PC Card Configuration Profile Product Type Type II PC Card Interfaces USB Options RLP, V42bis

Page 149: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 149 of 272

OK ATI9 (0136SE101D\\MODEM\\PC30091) OK

Page 150: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 150 of 272

11 Serial Interface

11.1 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Set behavior of carrier detect

AT&C[<value>] OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT&C? &C: <value>

OK

Test if the command is supported

AT&C=? &C: (list of supported <value>s)

OK Description:

Determines how ITU-T V.24 circuit 109 (Data Carrier Detect) relates to the detection of a received line signal from the remote end.

Defined values: <value> Description

0 DCD always on

1 DCD follows the connection. Default value Note: If in online command mode, while running a TCP/IP session through AT Commands, DCD will only be updated when returning to online data mode using ATO.

11.2 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response

Description Command Possible Responses

Control actions from DTE

AT&D[=][<value>] OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT&D? &D: <value>

OK

Test if the command is supported

AT&D=? &D: (list of supported <value>s)

OK Description:

Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE. This command controls the behavior of online data state when the

Page 151: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 151 of 272

Data Terminal Ready (DTR - circuit 108.2) line is deasserted by the DTE.

Defined values: <value> Description

0 Ignore.

1 When in on-line data mode, deassert DTR switches to on-line command mode.

2 When in on-line data mode, deassert DTR closes the current connection and switch to off-line command mode. (Default value)

11.3 ATV DCE Response Format

Description Command Possible Responses

Set DCE response format

ATV[=]<value> OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

ATV? V: <value>

Test if the command is supported

ATV=? V: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the <S3><S4> additions to the command response.

Additional Information: It shall be noted that in the case where a final result code is pending, this will delay any unsolicited result codes to not be returned until after the final result code has been sent.

Defined values: <value> Description

0 Display numeric result codes

1 Display verbose result codes. Default value List of result codes

ATV1/ATV=1 ATV0/ATV=0 Description

OK 0 Acknowledges execution of a command Final

CONNECT 1 A connection has been established; the DCE is moving from command state to online data state

Page 152: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 152 of 272

ATV1/ATV=1 ATV0/ATV=0 Description Intermediate

RING 2 The DCE has detected an incoming call signal from the network Unsolicited

NO CARRIER

3 The connection has been terminated or the attempt to establish a connection failed

Intermediate

ERROR 4 Command not recognized, command line maximum length exceeded, parameter value invalid, or other problem with processing the command line

Final

NO DIALTONE

6 No dial tone detected

Final

BUSY 7 Engaged (busy) signal detected

Final

CONNECT <TEXT>

None Same as CONNECT, but includes manufacturer-specific text that may specify DTE speed, line speed, error control, data compression, or other status Intermediate

11.4 AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format

Description Command Possible Responses

Defines DTE-DCE character framing

AT+ICF=[format [,parity]]

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+ICF? +ICF: <format>[,<parity>]

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+ICF=? +ICF: (list of supported <format>s), (list of supported <parity>s)

Page 153: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 153 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

OK

ERROR Description:

This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text and result code, if this is not automatically determined; AT+IPR=0 forces AT+ICF=0 (see AT+IPR).

Additional Information: Only applicable to RS-232. This command is provided for compatibility only and has no effect on PC Card functionality over USB.

Defined values: <format> Description

1 8 Data 2 Stop

2 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop

3 8 Data 1 Stop. (Default value)

4 7 Data 2 Stop

5 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop

6 7 Data 1 Stop

<parity> Description

0 Odd

1 Even

2 Mark

3 Space (Default value)

11.5 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Defines DTE-DCE local flow control

AT+IFC=[<by_te>, [<by_ta>]]

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+IFC? +IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>

Test if the command is

AT+IFC=? +IFC: (list of supported <by_te>s,<by_ta>s)

Page 154: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 154 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses supported Description:

Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in on-line data mode. No flow control is enabled when in any of the command modes.

Defined values: <by_te> Description

0 No flow control on DTE

1 Xon/Xoff flow control from DTE to DCE. Control characters are removed by the DCE interface

2 RTS flow control from DTE. (Default value)

3 Xon/Xoff flow control from DTE to DCE. Contorl characters are passed to the remote DCE/DTE.

<by_ta> Description

0 No flow control on DCE

1 Xon/Xoff flow control from DCE to DTE

2 CTS flow control from DCE. Default value

11.6 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate

Description Command Possible Responses

Defines fixed DTE rate

AT+IPR=[rate] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+IPR? +IPR:<rate>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+IPR=? +IPR: (List of supported autodetectable <rate>s), (list of fixed-only <rate>s)]

OK

ERROR Description:

Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in addition to 1200 bits/s or 9600 bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause 4.3).

Page 155: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 155 of 272

Additional Information: Only applicable to RS-232. This command is provided for compatibility only and has no effect on PC Card functionality over USB.

Defined values: <rate> Description

Discrete integer value

0

300

600

1200

2400

3600

4800

7200

9600

14400

19200

28800

38400

57600

115200

230400

460800

The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate, e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by a particular DCE are manufacturer specific.

The following rates, are supported;

0 = autobaud. Default value.

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

3600 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

14400 bps

19200 bps

28800 bps

38400 bps

57600 bps

115200 bps

230400 bps

460800 bps

11.7 ATE Command Echo

Description Command Possible Responses

Request Command Echo

ATE[<value>]

OK

ERROR

Show the current ATE? <value>

Page 156: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 156 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses setting

Test if the command is supported

ATE=? E: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received from the DTE during command state and online command state.

Defined values: <value> Description

0 DCE does not echo characters during command state and online command state

1 DCE echoes characters during command state and online command state. Default value

11.8 ATQ Result Code Suppression

Description Command Possible Responses

Set Result Code Suppression

ATQ<value> OK

ERROR

Read the current setting ATQ? Q: <value>

Test if the command is supported

ATQ=? Q: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This command determines whether the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE. When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate, final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or trailer - is transmitted.

Defined values:

<value> Description

0 DCE transmits result codes. Default value

1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted

Page 157: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 157 of 272

12 Network

12.1 AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Set operation

during

GSM Idle mode

AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

*E2EMM

GSM Idle

Serving Cell

MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>

Neighbor Cells

MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>

OK

ERROR

CME ERROR

Set operation

during

GSM Dedicated mode

AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

*E2EMM

GSM Dedicated

Serving Cell

MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, RxLF, RxLS, RxQF, RxQS, TA, TN

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxlfull>,<rxlsub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>

Neighbor Cells

MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2

Page 158: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 158 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>

OK

ERROR

CME ERROR

Set operation

during

WCDMA mode

AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

*E2EMM

WCDMA - Serving Cell <RRCState>

MCC, MNC, LAC, Ch, SC, RSCP, EcN0, RSSI, ServL, ServQ, Hs, Rs

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ch>,<sc>,<rscp>,<EcNo>,<rssi><ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hs>,<Rs>

Monitored Intra-Frequency Cells

Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<Rn>

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<Rn>

Monitored Inter-Frequency Cells

Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<Rn>

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<

Page 159: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 159 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses Rn>

Monitored Inter-RAT Cells

Ch, BSIC, CIO, RSSI, RxLevMin

<ch>,<bsic>,<cio>,<rssi>,<rxlevmin>

<ch>,<bsic>,<cio>,<rssi>,<rxlevmin>

Detected Cells

Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<Rn>

<ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr>,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<Rn>

OK

ERROR

CME ERROR

Read AT*E2EMM? Not Supported

Test if the command is supported

AT*E2EMM=? *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s)

ERROR

Description: There is only one presentation format mode (Display)) and one response type (one shot response). The purpose of the Display presentation format mode is to display the data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks (<CR><LF>). The response types give the user the choice of one-shot information or an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response. Responses occur when the module is camped on a network.

Note: The periodic unsolicited response is not supported in this version of *E2EMM

Page 160: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 160 of 272

Examples: AT*E2EMM=9 *E2EMM WCDMA - Serving Cell ( Idle ) MCC, MNC, LAC, Ch, SC, RSCP, EcNo, RSSI, ServL, ServQ, Hs, Rs 310, 410, 32c5, 9766, 267, -33, - 3, 0, 1, 11, , Monitored Intra-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn 9766, 275, 4, 24, 1, 11, , Monitored Inter-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn Monitored Inter-RAT Cells Ch, BSIC, CIO, RSSI, RxLevMin 674, 3, 0, 255, 0 673, 29, 0, 255, 0 670, b, 0, 255, 0 681, 32, 0, 255, 0 677, 2, 0, 255, 0 676, 7, 0, 255, 0 684, 23, 0, 255, 0 683, 16, 0, 255, 0 Detected Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn OK

Defined values:

<n> Description

9 Presentation of the network location information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF> line separators

<m> Description

0-255

Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited responses. <m>=0 means immediately send out ONE response only.

Default and only supported value: 0

<RRCState> Description

String type Idle, Dedicated

Page 161: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 161 of 272

<mcc> Description

Integer type

Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU

<mnc> Description

Integer type

Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell

<lac> Description

Integer type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> Description

Integer type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

<bsic> Description

Integer type

One byte Base Stations Identification code in hexadecimal format

<ch> Description

(0-1023) It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier

<rxl> Description

Integer type

-110 to -40

Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle mode.

<rxlfull> Description

Integer type

-110 to -40

Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is taken in non-DTX mode during a SACCH multiframe

<rxlsub> Description

Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx

Page 162: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 162 of 272

<rxlsub> Description

-110 to -40 Level is taken from the DownLink signal in DTX mode and the average is applied to subset of SACCH frames

<rxqfull> Description

Received Signal Quality (non-DTX mode)

0 BER < 0.2%

1 BER < 0.4%

2 BER < 0.8%

3 BER < 1.6%

4 BER < 3.2%

5 BER < 6.4%

6 BER < 12.8%

<rxqsub> Description

Received Signal Quality (DTX mode)

0 BER < 0.2%

1 BER < 0.4%

2 BER < 0.8%

3 BER < 1.6%

4 BER < 3.2%

5 BER < 6.4%

6 BER < 12.8%

<c1> Description

Integer Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08

<c2> Description

Integer Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection

Page 163: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 163 of 272

<ta> Description

0-63

According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13uS. <ta> is the integer representation of the timing advance in binary format

64-255

Reserved

<tn> Description

0-7 Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel

<rscp> Description

-120 to -25 Receive Signal Code Power

<EcNo> Description

0 to 49 Carrier to Noise Ratio

<ServLvl> Description

1 to 11 Cell selection/reselection quality measure of serving cell

<ServQual> Description

-110 to -40 Cell selection quality of the serving cell

<Hs> Description

0x00 - 0xFFFF Quality level threshold criterion H of serving cell

<Rs> Description

0x00 - 0xFFFF Cell ranking criterion R of serving cell

<Hn> Description

0x00 - 0xFFFF Quality level threshold criterion H of the

Page 164: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 164 of 272

<Hn> Description strongest neighbor cell

<Rn> Description

0x00 - 0xFF Cell ranking criterion R of the strongest neighbor cell

<ULTxPwr> Description

-110 to -40 Max allowed uplink Tx power

<PtxPwr> Description

10 to 50 Primary CPICH Tx Power

<cio> Description

-128 to 127 Cell Individual Offset

<rssi> Description

0 to 255 Received Signal Strength Indication

12.2 AT*ERINFO Network Capability

Description Command Possible Responses

Active the response mode

AT*ERINFO=<mode>

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Query the current radio access information

AT*ERINFO? *ERINFO: <mode>,<gsm_rinfo>,<umts_rinfo>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT*ERINFO=? *ERINFO: (list of supported <mode>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

Unsolicited *ERINFO:

Page 165: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 165 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses report if *ERINFO reports are enabled

<gsm_rinfo>,<umts_info>

Description: This command is used to provide an unsolicited result code indicating the current technology of the current cell, or to query the current cell information.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Disable unsolicited information. Default value.

1 Enable unsolicited information

<gsm_rinfo> Description

0 No GPRS or EGPRS available

1 GPRS service is available

2 EGPRS service is available

<umts_rinfo> Description

0 No UMTS or HSDPA service available

1 UMTS service available

2 HSDPA service availalbe Examples:

AT*ERINFO=0 OK AT*ERINFO? *ERINFO: 0,2,2 OK

12.3 AT+CLCK Facility Lock

Description Command Possible Responses

Request facility

AT+CLCK=<fac>, <mode>[,<passwd>

when <mode>=2 and command successful:

Page 166: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 166 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses lock [,<class>]] +CLCK:

<status>[,<class1> [<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2>[...]]

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLCK=? +CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

OK Description:

The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2), the response line for 'not active' case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Call barring facilities are based on GSM/UMTS supplementary services (refer to 3GPP 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services, is described in the GSM/UMTS standard.

Additional information: Note: "PS" and <mode>=1 correspond to Auto Lock

Defined values: <fac> Description

“PS” PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted)

“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock command issued)

"CS" CNTRL (lock control surface)

“AO” BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)

“OI” BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)

“AI” BAIC (bar all incoming calls)

“IR” BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the home country)

“OX” BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to home country)

“AB” All barring services

“AG” All out going barring services

Page 167: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 167 of 272

<fac> Description

“AC” All in coming barring services

“FD” SIM fixed dialing feature. PIN2 is required as a password

“PN” Network personalization

“PU” Network subset personalization

“PP” Service provider personalization

“PC” Corporate personalization

<mode> Description

0 Unlock

1 Lock

2 Query status

10 Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on always ask for ME_lock_code)

<status> Description

0 Not active

1 Active

2 Not available

<passw> Description

string type

Is the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with change password command, +CPWD

<classx> Description

1 Voice L1

2 Data

4 Fax (Not supported)

8 Short message service

16 Data circuit sync

32 Data circuit async

64 Dedicated packet access

128 Dedicated PAD Access

Page 168: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 168 of 272

12.4 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number

Description Command Possible Responses

Request subscriber number

AT+CNUM +CNUM: [<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1> [,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR> <LF>

+CNUM: [<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2> [,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CNUM=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Description: This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.

Additional information: The implementation of this command is made according to Bluetooth HFP 1.5, which deviates somewhat from the 3GPP, and the parameters <alpha> and <itc> are not supported but included to show the full command as specified in 3GPP TS 27.005.

Defined values: <alphax> Description

Alphanumeric string

Associated with <numberx>; Not supported

<numberx> Description

String type Phone number of format specified by <typex>

<typex> Description

Integer type Type of address, (refer to 3GPP 24.008)

Page 169: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 169 of 272

<speed> Description

data rate

Always displays 8. +CNUM is a standard command (27.007). This field makes no sense for voice numbers and fax numbers, and the module has no knowledge what speed the user (SIM) has subscribed to.

<service> Description

0 Asynchronous modem

4 Voice

5 Fax

<itc> Description Not supported

0 3.1kHz

1 UDI The typex field is defined in 3GPP 24.008 as an integer which combines the Number Type parameter and the Numbering Plan parameter. The parameters may be extracted as follows:

Subtract 128 from the displayed value Divide the result by 16. The quotient is the Number Type parameter. The remainder is the Numbering Plan parameter.

For example, given a displayed typex value of 161: 161 - 128 = 33 33 / 16 = 2 with a remainder of 1 Therefore Number Type = 2, Numbering Plan = 1 The definitions are given in the next two tables.

Number Type Description

0 Unknown

1 International number

2 National number

3 Network specific number

4 Dedicated address, short code

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved for extension

Numbering Plan Description

0 unknown

Page 170: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 170 of 272

Numbering Plan Description

1 ISDN/telephony numbering plan (Rec. E.164/E.163)

2 reserved

3 data numbering plan (Recommendation X.121)

4 telex numbering plan (Recommendation F.69)

5-7 reserved

8 national numbering plan

9 private numbering plan

10 reserved

11 reserved for CTS (see 3GPP TS 44.056)

12-14 reserved

15 reserved for extension

12.5 AT+COPN Read Operator Names

Description Command Possible Responses

Request operator selection

AT+COPN +COPN: <numeric1>,<alpha1>

[<CR><LF>

+COPN: <numeric2>,<alpha2>

[...]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+COPN=? OK

Description: Command returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory shall be returned. This command can return several hundred names and can execute for up to 90 seconds..

Defined values: <numericn>: string type; operator in numeric format. (See AT+COPS) <alphan>: string type; operator in long alphanumeric format. (See AT+COPS)

Page 171: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 171 of 272

12.6 AT+COPS Operator Selection

Description Command Possible Responses

Request operator selection

AT+COPS=[<mode> [,<format> [,<oper>[,<AcT>]]]]

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+COPS? +COPS: <mode>[,<format>, <oper>,<AcT>]

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported; Perform operator search

AT+COPS=? +COPS: [list of supported (<stat>,long alphanumeric <oper>, short alphanumeric <oper>,numeric <oper>,<AcT>)s]

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

The set command performs operator selection. <mode>=0 or 1 forces an attempt to select and register the GSM/UMTS network operator. The value of <mode> determines whether the selection is done automatically by the ME or is forced to operator <oper>, specified in format <format>. If the selected operator is not available, no other operator will be selected (except for <mode>=4). The selected operator name format applies to futher read commands (+COPS?). The read part of the command returns the current mode and current operator. If there is no current operator, only the mode is returned. The test part of this command returns a list of quintuplets, each representing an operator present in the network. Quintuplet consists of an integer indicating the availability of the operator <stat>, long and short alphanumeric format of the name of the operator, numeric format representation of the operator, and the access technology <AcT>. Any of the formats may be unavailable and should then be an empty field. The list of operators shall be in

Page 172: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 172 of 272

order: home network, networks referenced in the SIM/UICC, and other networks.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Automatic (<oper> field is ignored). Default value.

1 Manual (<oper> field shall be present and <AcT> is optional)

3 Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> and <AcT> fields are ignored); this value is not applicable in read command response

4 Manual/automatic (<oper> field shall be present); if manual selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered

Note: When using <mode> = 1, only <format> = 2 is allowed.

<format> Description

0 long format alphanumeric <oper>. Default value.

1 short format alphanumeric <oper>

2 Numeric <oper>. A text string representation of the PLMN code consisting of the 3-digit MCC and 2 or 3-digit MNC.

<oper> Description

string type

Format determined by the <format> setting. Default is empty string.

<stat> Description

0 Unknown

1 Available

2 Current

3 Forbidden

<AcT> Description

0 GSM Access Technology

2 UTRAN Access Technology Example:

AT+COPS=? +COPS: (2,“UK VODAFONE”,,“23415”,0)

Page 173: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 173 of 272

+COPS: (3,“UK Orange PCS Ltd”,,“23433”,0) +COPS: (3,“T-Mobile UK”,,“23430”,0) +COPS: (3,“O2 - UK”,,“23410”,0) OK An invalid home network, eg. no SIM inserted, will display as null string as follows: AT+COPS=? +COPS: (0,“”,,“”,0) +COPS: (2,“UK VODAFONE”,,“23415”,0) OK

12.7 AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List

Description Command Possible Responses

Request operator selection

AT+CPOL=[<index>][, <format>[,<oper>[,GSM_AcT,<GSM_Compact_AcT>,<UTRAN_AcT>]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Shows the current setting

AT+CPOL? +CPOL: <index1>,<format>,<oper1>[,<GSM_AcT1>,<GSM_Compact_AcT1>,<UTRAN_AcT1>] [<CR><LF>+CPOL: <index2>,<format>,<oper2>[,<GSM_AcT2>,<GSM_Compact_AcT2>,<UTRAN_AcT2>] [...]] +CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPOL=? +CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported <format>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command is used to edit the PLMN selector with Access Technology lists in the SIM card or active application in the UICC(GSM or USIM).

Page 174: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 174 of 272

Execute command writes an entry in the SIM/USIM list of preferred PLMNs, which could previously have been selected by the command +CPLS, however, as this command is not supported, the User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology, EFPLMNwAcT, is the one accessed by default. If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed. The Access Technology selection parameters, <GSM_AcT>, <GSM_Compact_AcT> and <UTRAN_AcT>, are required when writing User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology, EF EFPLMNwAcT, If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed Note: ME may also update this list automatically when new networks are selected. Note: AcT parameters are optional for the set command, but if one of the parameters is issued then all should be issued.If the parameters are not issued at all or only indicated by commas then the respective default values 1,0,1 are used. Read command returns all used entries from the SIM list of preferred operators. Test command returns the whole index range supported by the SIM. Note: While the +CPLS command is not supported, this +CPOL command will behave as though +CPLS is set to value 0. Thus, per TS27.007, this behavior is "User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology EFPLMNwAcT, if not found in the SIM/UICC then PLMN preferred list EFPLMNsel (this file is only available in SIM card or GSM application selected in UICC)"

Defined values: <index> Description

Integer type

The order number of operator in the SIM preferred operator list (value range returned by test command)

<format> Description

0 long format alphanumeric <oper>

1 short format alphanumeric <oper>

2 numeric <oper> Default value

<oper> Description

string type

Format determined by the <format> setting

Page 175: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 175 of 272

<GSM_AcT> Description

0 Access technology not selected

1 Access technology selected

<GSM_Compact_AcT> Description

0 Access technology not selected

1 Access technology selected

<UTRAN_AcT> Description

0 Access technology not selected

1 Access technology selected

12.8 AT+CREG Network Registration

Description Command Possible Responses

Request network registration

AT+CREG=[<n>] +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CREG? +CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CREG=? +CREG: (list of supported <n>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status, or code +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME. Location information

Page 176: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 176 of 272

elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered in the network. Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. Default value

1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>

2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

<stat> Description

0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator to register with

1 Registered, home network

2 Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new operator to register with

3 Registration denied

4 Unknown

5 Registered, roaming

<lac> Description

string type

two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195 in decimal)

<ci> Description

string type

Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. Four bytes are required for UMTS, whereas only two bytes are applicable for GSM, and the two first bytes are then zeros e.g. 00001A02

Example: AT+CREG? +CREG: 0,1 OK

12.8.1 +CREG - Network Registration Unsolicted Response +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

Page 177: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 177 of 272

Page 178: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 178 of 272

13 Phonebook

13.1 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read Notes:

* - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.

Description Command Possible Responses

Read phone book entries

AT+CPBR=<index1> [,<index2>]

+CPBR:<index1>,<number>, <type>,<text>[[,<text_datetime>]<CR><LF>

+CPBR: <index2>,<number>,<type>, <text>[,<text_datetime>]] +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPBR=? +CPBR: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength>,<tlength> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: Returns phonebook entries in location number range <index1>... <index2> from the current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned. Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number. When the “Received Calls List”, the “Missed Calls List” or the “Dialed Calls List” is selected, the two additional fields <text_date> and <text_time> containing date and time will be returned. In this case the <text> field containing text associated with the number has to be extracted from one of the phonebooks (SIM, ME or TA). If listing fails in ME, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

Defined values: <indexn> Description

integer type

Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory

Page 179: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 179 of 272

<number> Description

string type

Phone number of format <type>

<type> Description

Integer type

Type of address octet, refer 3GPP 24.008

129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown

Default if no "+" in <number>

145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

Default if "+" in <number>

161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

128 - 255 Other values refer to 3GPP 24.008

<text> Description

string type

Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as specified by the Select TE Character Set command, +CSCS.

<nlength> Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

<tlength> Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

<text_datetime> Description

string Date and time in the format: yy/mm/dd,hh:mm Example:

AT+CPBR=1,99 +CPBR: 1,“44123456789”,145,“Test Number” +CPBR: 2,“440987654321”,145,“Test number 2” +CPBR: 3,“449876543210”,129,“Test Number 3”

Page 180: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 180 of 272

OK

13.2 AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select Notes:

* - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.

Description Command Possible Responses

Set phone book storage

AT+CPBS=<storage> [,<password>]

+CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+CPBS? +CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPBS=? +CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s) +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: Selects phonebook memory storage <storage>, which is used by other phonebook commands. Read command returns currently selected memory, number of used locations and total number of locations in the memory.

Defined values: <storage> Description

“FD” SIM/USIM fix-dialing-phonebook. If a SIM card is present or if a UICC with an active GSM application is present, the information in EFFDN under DFTelecom is selected. If a UICC with an active USIM application is present, the information in EFFDN under ADFUSIM is selected.

“EN” Emergency numbers (read only)

“SM” SIM phone book. Default value.

"LD" SIM/USIM last number dialed list. Not Supported

“DC” ME dialled calls list (read only) Not Supported

“RC” ME received calls list (read only) Not Supported

“MC” ME missed calls list (read only) Not Supported

"ON" SIM (or ME) own numbers (MSISDNs) list (reading of this storage may be available through +CNUM also). When storing information in the SIM/UICC, if a SIM card is present or if a UICC with an active GSM application is

Page 181: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 181 of 272

<storage> Description present, the information in EFMSISDN under DFTelecom is selected. If a UICC with an active USIM application is present, the information in EFMSISDN under ADFUSIM is selected.

<passwd> Description

String type

Represents the password required when selecting password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for storage “FD”

<used> Description

Integer type

Number of locations used in the selected memory (<storage>)

<total> Description

Integer type

Total number of locations in the selected memory (<storage>)

13.3 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write Notes:

* - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.

Description Command Possible Responses

Request phone book write

AT+CPBW=<index> [, <number>[,<type> [,<text>]]]

+CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPBW=? +CPBW: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength> ,(list of supported <type>s),<tlength> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: Writes phonebook entry in location number <index> in the current phonebook memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the <number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If <index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the first free location in the phonebook. If writing fails in ME,

Page 182: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 182 of 272

+CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns location range supported by the current storage as a compound value, the maximum length of <number> field, supported number formats of the storage, and the maximum length of <text> field. If ME is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If storage does not offer format information, the format list is empty parenthesis.

Defined values: <index> Description

integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory

<number> Description

string type

Phone number of format <type>

<type> Description

integer format

Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129. (refer to 3GPP 24.008)

129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown

Default if no "+" in <number>.

145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

Default if "+" in <number>.

128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

<text> Description

string type

Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS See description at end of this section

<nlength> Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

Page 183: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 183 of 272

<tlength> Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

Notes: When using +CPBW to add entries to SIM/USIM phonebook, it is likely that not all entries will be accepted for numbers longer than 20 digits. There is a dependency on the size of the extension file EFext1. If the space allocated to the extension file is used up, then new phonebook write attempts of numbers with more than 20 digits will not be accepted. Entries stored in memories DC, RC, and MC, will not be deleted using +CPBW.

Page 184: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 184 of 272

14 Short Message Services - Point to Point

14.1 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages

Description Command Possible Responses

Set service or service preference

AT+CGSMS=[<service>] OK

ERROR

Read the command

AT+CGSMS? +CGSMS: <service>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGSMS=? +CGSMS: (list of available <service>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.

Defined values: <service> Description

0 GPRS/Packet Domain

1 Circuit switched

2 GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS/packet domain not available)

3 Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if circuit switched not available). Default value.

14.2 AT+CMGF Message Format Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses

Set message format

AT+CMGF=<mode> OK

ERROR

Show the current AT+CMGF? +CMGF: <mode>

Page 185: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 185 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses setting OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGF=? +CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages given as separate parameters). Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 PDU mode. Default value

1 Text mode. Not Supported.

14.3 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory PDU Mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Write message to memory

AT+CMGW=<length> [,<stat>]<CR>

<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>

+CMGW: <index>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGW=? OK

ERROR

Description: Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status values to be given. Entering PDU is the same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing fails,

Page 186: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 186 of 272

final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage. This command is abortable. This command is abortable by sending <ESC> character (IRA 27) This character must be be sent before the terminating <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) is sent in order to have any effect.

Defined values: <stat> Description

2 Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<length> Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal format

14.4 AT+CMGC Send Command PDU Mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Send command message

AT+CMGC=<length><CR> <pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>

if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful: +CMGC: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]

if sending fails: +CMS ERROR:

Page 187: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 187 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGC=? OK

ERROR

Description: Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable.

Defined values: <length> Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted String

In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal format

<mr> Description

Integer type

3GPP 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

Page 188: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 188 of 272

<ackpdu> Description

String GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter

Not supported

14.5 AT+CMGS Send Message PDU Mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Send message

AT+CMGS=<length> <CR><pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>

+CMGS: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGS=? OK

ERROR

Description: Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. •<length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded). •The TA shall send a four character sequence <CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given from TE to ME/TA. •The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for <pdu>) and given in one line; ME converts this coding into the actual octets of PDU. •When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>) equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre Address +CSCA is used. •<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU

This command is abortable.

Page 189: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 189 of 272

•Sending can be aborted by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27). This character must be sent before the terminating <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) is sent in order to have any effect.

Defined values: <mr> Description

Integer type

3GPP 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

<length> Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal format

<ackpdu> Description

... 3GPP 23.040 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter

Not supported

14.6 AT+CMSS Send From Storage PDU mode

Description Command Possible Responses

Send from storage

AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]] +CMSS: <mr>

+CMS

Page 190: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 190 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMSS=? OK

ERROR

Description: Sends message with location value <index> from message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage for definition and setting of <mem2> Note: Parameters <da> and <toda> will be accepted without error but ignored (they will not override the values stored in the message <pdu>).

This command is abortable. Defined values: <index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<mr> Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

14.7 AT+CMGD Delete Message Common for both PDU and Text modes Description Command Possible Responses

Delete message

AT+CMGD=<index>[, <delflag>]

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGD=? +CMGD: (list of supported <index>s[,list of supported

Page 191: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 191 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses <delflag>s]

OK

ERROR Description:

Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location <index>. If <delflag> is present and not set to 0, the ME ignores <index> and acts according to the definition of <delflag> in the table shown below. If <delflag> is omitted, only the entry in <index> will be deleted. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations.

Defined values: <index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<delflag> Description

0 Delete the message specified in <index>. Default.

1 Delete all read messages from preferred messages storage, leaving unread messages and stored mobile originated messages (whether sent or not) untouched.

2 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage and sent mobile originated messages, leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated messages untouched.

3 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage and unsent mobile originated messages leaving unread messages untouched.

4 Delete all messages from preferred message storage including unread messages.

14.8 AT+CMGL List Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses

List message

AT+CMGL=[<stat>] +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length> <CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>

Page 192: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 192 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length> <CR><LF><pdu>[…]]

+CMS ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGL=? +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)

Description: Note: Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See +CPMS for definition of <mem1>

Defined values: <stat> Description

Integer type Indicates status of message in memory.

0 Received unread message (i.e. new message)

1 Received read message

2 Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

3 Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

4 All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)

Default value

<index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<alpha> Description

String type

Will be left empty but not omitted

<length> Description

Integer Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

Page 193: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 193 of 272

<length> Description type the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal format

Example: AT+CMGF=1 +CMGL: 1,1,,91 07919107739613F2000A81000000000032007040709074348A536176594E07B4DFE234BBEC62A7ED65D7F8DD0651CB6E777A0E7296EF731D485A9F97C9F3751A242FD3D3F2F21C6496BFDB207AD9ED4ECF416133BD2C0711C3F6F41C34ACC341F7B41B +CMGL: 2,1,,85 07919107739613F2000A81000000000032007040705170428A4C6176594E07B4DFE234BBEC62A7ED65D7F8DD0651CB6E777A0E7296EF731D4828CF87DD20FA3DED9E83E0753AA8EA9ABA406937FD0D2286EDE93968588783E6E5767A0E OK AT+CMGL=? +CMGL: (0-4) OK

14.9 AT+CMGR Read Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses

Read message

AT+CMGR= <index>

+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>] <CR><LF><pdu>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGR=? OK

ERROR

Description:

Page 194: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 194 of 272

Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See +CPMS for definition of <mem1>

Defined values: <stat> Description

Integer type Indicates the status of message in memory.

0 Received unread message (i.e. new message)

1 Received read message

2 Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

3 Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<alpha> Description

String type Will be left empty but not omitted

<length> Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal format

Page 195: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 195 of 272

14.10 AT +CMMS More Messages to Send Parameter Command Syntax

Description Command Possible response(s)

Set mode of SMS relay protocol link

+CMMS=[<n>]

Read the current setting +CMMS? +CMMS: <n>

Test command to show if the command is supported

+CMMS=? +CMMS: (list of supported <n>s)

Description Set command controls the continuity of SMS relay protocol link. When feature is enabled (and supported by network) multiple messages can be sent much faster as link is kept open. Test command returns supported values as a compound value. Defined Values

<n> Description

0 Disable

1 Keep enabled until the time between the response of the latest message send command (+CMGS, +CMSS, etc.) and the next send command exceeds 1-5 seconds, then ME shall close the link and switch <n> automatically back to 0

2 Enable (if the time between the response of the latest message send command and the next send command exceeds 1-5 seconds, ME shall close the link but TA shall not switch automatically back to <n>=0)

14.11 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses

Set new message indication to TE

AT+CNMI=[<mode> [,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>]]]]]

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CNMI? +CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>

OK

ERROR

Page 196: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 196 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Show if the command is supported

AT+CNMI=? +CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <mt>s), (list of supported <bm>s), (list of supported <ds>s), (list of supported <bfr>s

OK

ERROR Description:

Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038). If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Indication mode to buffer in TA Not supported

1 Indication mode to discard Not supported

2 Indication mode to buffer in TA while TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in online data mode) and flush to TE when the link is unreserved. Otherwise, forward them directly to the TE.

Default & only supported value

<mt> Description

0 No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.

Use <mem3> as preferred storage.

Default value

1 SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

2 Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly

Page 197: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 197 of 272

<mt> Description to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not stored in ME/TA:

+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode)

Class 2 messages are handled as if <mt>=1

3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>. Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1

Note: See below for a table showing the indication and message destination dependency on SMS Class.

<bm> Description

0 Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE

Default value

2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode). New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory

<ds> Description

0 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA

Default value

1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU mode). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA

2 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA

Not supported

<bfr> Description

0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1..3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).

1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this

Page 198: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 198 of 272

<bfr> Description command is cleared when <mode> 1..3 is entered

Not supported Unsolicited Result codes:

+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu> +CMTI: <mem>,<index> +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

Indication and destination of message routing vs. SMS class and <mt> setting.

SMS Class

<mt> Indication Destination

CPMS <mem3>="ME"

Destination

CPMS<mem3>="SM"

none 0 none ME SM

none 1 +CMTI... ME SM

none 2 +CMT... TE TE

none 3 +CMTI... ME SM

0 0 none ME SM

0 1 +CMTI... ME SM

0 2 +CMT... TE TE

0 3 +CMTI... ME SM

1 0 none ME SM

1 1 +CMTI... ME SM

1 2 +CMT... TE TE

1 3 +CMTI... ME SM

2 0 none SM SM

2 1 +CMTI... SM SM

2 2 +CMTI... SM SM

2 3 +CMTI... SM SM

3 0 none ME SM

3 1 +CMTI ME SM

3 2 +CMT... TE TE

3 3 +CMT... TE TE

Page 199: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 199 of 272

14.11.1 +CMTI New Message Indication Unsolicited Response

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating that a message is received. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CMTI: <mem>,<index>

Defined values: <mem> Description

“ME” ME message storage

“SM” SIM message storage

<index> Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

14.11.2 +CMT Received Message Unsolicited Response Description:

An Unsolicited Response indicating a Short Message is received and routed directly to TE. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

Defined values: <length> Description

integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

Page 200: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 200 of 272

14.11.3 +CBM Received Cell Broadcast Unsolicited Response

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating a Cell Broadcast Message is received and routed directly to TE. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

Defined values: <length> Description

integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

14.11.4 +CDS SMS Status Report Unsolicited Response Description:

An Unsolicited Response indicating sent message status. +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

Defined values: <length> Description

integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Description

Unquoted string

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

Page 201: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 201 of 272

<pdu> Description In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

14.12 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage

Description Command Possible Responses

Set preferred message storage

AT+CPMS=<mem1> [,<mem2>] [,<mem3>]

+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: <mem1>,<used1>,<total1, <mem2>,<used2>,<total2, <mem3>,<used3>,<total3>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPMS=? +CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s),(list of supported <mem2>s),(list of supported <mem3>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.

Additional information: The setting made by AT+CPMS=.... is valid for all channels. The current setting applied via AT+CPMS will not be maintained over a power cycle.

Defined values:

Page 202: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 202 of 272

<mem1> Description

string type

Memory from which messages are read and deleted (commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message +CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)

“ME” ME message storage

“SM” SIM message storage. Default value

<mem2> Description

string type

Memory to which writing and sending operations are made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)

“ME” ME message storage

“SM” SIM message storage

<mem3> Description

string type

Memory to which received SMSs are preferred to be stored (unless forwarded directly to TE).

“ME” ME message storage

“SM” SIM message storage

<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description

integer type Total number of messages currently in <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively

<total1>,<total2> ,<total3>

Description

integer type Total number of message locations in <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively

Examples: AT+CPMS=? +CPMS: (“ME”,“SM”),(“ME”,“SM”),("ME",“SM”) OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,0,100,“SM”,0,13,“SM”,0,13 OK

Page 203: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 203 of 272

AT+CPMS=“me”,“me”,“sm” +CPMS: 0,100,0,100,0,13 OK

14.13 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses

Set service centre address

AT+CSCA=<sca> [,<tosca>]

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CSCA? +CSCA: <sca>,<tosca>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSCA=? OK

ERROR Description:

Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number starting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.

Defined values: <sca> Description

string type

3GPP TS 24.011 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set

<tosca> Description

integer type

3GPP TS 24.011 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer format

129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown

Default if no "+" in sca.

145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

Default if "+" in sca.

Page 204: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 204 of 272

<tosca> Description

161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 Other values refer 3GPP 24.008 Example:

AT+CSCA? +CSCA: “44385016005”,145 OK

14.14 AT+CSCS Select Character Set

Description Command Possible Responses

Set command informs TA which character set is used by the TE

AT+CSCS=<chset> OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CSCS? +CSCS: <chset>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSCS=? +CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME character sets. When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero. Read command shows current setting and test command display conversion schemes implemented in the TA.

Defined values: <chset> Description

“UCS2” Unicode, 16-bit Universal Multiple Octet Coded Character Set 2 (ISO/IEC 10646)

“GSM” GSM default alphabet (3GPP 23.038). Note this setting causes software flow control (Xon/Xoff) problems. Default value

“IRA” International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note this is the recommended default setting by 3GPP 27.007

“8859- ISO 8859 graphic character sets, where n is an integer

Page 205: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 205 of 272

<chset> Description n” (1-6,C,A,G,H) that indicates the specific character set.

Only the 8859-1 Latin1 character set is supported.

"UTF-8"

Universal text format, 8 bit

Example: AT+CSCS? +CSCS: “GSM” OK

14.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses

Set the text mode parameters

AT+CSMP=[<fo> [,<vp>[,<pid> [,<dcs>]]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CSMP? +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSMP=? OK

Description: Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid> parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs> determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.

Defined values: <fo> Description

0-255

Depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value 17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (Default value 2) in integer format

<vp> Description

0- (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12

Page 206: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 206 of 272

<vp> Description 143 hours)

144-167

12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes) Default value is 167.

168-196

(TP-VP-166) x 1 day

197-255

(TP-VP-192) x 1 week

<pid> Description

0-255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0, according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9

<dcs> Description

0-255 Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and compressed text not supported. Default value is 0.

14.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses

Select message service

AT+CSMS=<service> +CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CSMS? +CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>, <bm>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSMS=? +CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for mobile originated messages and <bm> for

Page 207: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 207 of 272

broadcast type messages. If the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

Defined values: <service> Description

0 3GPP 23.040 and 23.041. The syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with 3GPP 27.005 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+ features which do not require new command syntax may be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new Phase 2+ data coding schemes)

2..127 Reserved

<mt> Description

0 Mobile terminated messages not supported

1 Mobile terminated messages supported Default

<mo> Description

0 Mobile originated messages not supported

1 Mobile originated messages supported Default

<bm> Description

0 Broadcast messages not supported

1 Broadcast messages supported Default

14.17 AT*E2CMGA Modify message attribute

Description Command Possible Responses

Set message attribute

AT*E2CMGA=<op>,<index>[,<attr>]

*E2CMGA: <attr> (for read operation)

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*E2CMGA=? *E2CMGA: (list of supported <op>s),(list of supported

Page 208: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 208 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses <index>es,(list of supported <attr>s)

Description: This command reads or modifies (selected by <op>) the attributes for a specific message selected by <index>.

Defined values: <op> Description

0 Read attribute

1 Write attribute

<index> Description

Integer type

(1-65535)

Index number of message to be modified

<attr> Description

0 Received-unread

1 Received-read

2 Stored unsent (only for <op>=0, read attribute)

3 Stored sent (only for <op>=0, read attribute)

14.18 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings

Description Command Possible Responses

Restore settings AT+CRES[=<profile>] +CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CRES=? +CRES: (list of supported <profile>s)

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Page 209: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 209 of 272

Description: This command restores message service settings saved by +CSAS from non-volatile SIM memory to active memory. A SIM can contain several profiles of settings. Only the settings controlled by AT+CSCA are stored with this command.

Defined values: <profile> Description

0..1 Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default value is 0

Note: The ATZ command is used to restore all other parameters settings. AT+CRES only restores parameters set by AT+CSCA.

14.19 AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings

Description Command Possible Responses

Save Settings AT+CSAS[=<profile>] +CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSAS=? +CSAS: (list of supported <profile>s)

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command saves active message service settings to SIM memory. A TA can contain several settings profiles. Only the settings specified in the Service Centre Address command, +CSCA, are saved. Test command displays the supported profile numbers for reading and writing of settings.

Defined values: <profile> Description

0..1 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored. Default value is 0

Note: The AT&W command is used to save all other parameters settings. AT+CSAS only stores parameters set by AT+CSCA.

Page 210: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 210 of 272

15 Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast

15.1 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Common for both PDU and text modes Description Command Possible Responses

Select cell broadcast message type

+CSCB=[<mode>[,<mids>[,<dcss>]]]

+CMS ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CSCB? +CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSCB=? +CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. Note that for mode 0, a value for <dcss> should be entered to specify which <dcss> should be accepted.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted. Default value.

1 Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted

Not supported

<mids> Description

string type

3GPP 23.041 CBM Message Identifier in integer format. All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string); e.g. “0,1,5-7”

<dcss> Description

string 3GPP 23.038 CBM Data Coding Scheme in integer format.

Page 211: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 211 of 272

<dcss> Description type All different possible combinations of CBM data coding

schemes (refer <dcs>) (default is empty string); e.g. "0-3,5"

Example: AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,“50”,"1" OK

15.2 AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication Notes:

* - SIM is required for query. ** - Query will not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Description Command Possible Responses

Set message waiting indication

AT*EMWI =<mode>

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Shows the current setting

AT*EMWI? *EMWI: <mode>+CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command is supported

AT*EMWI=? *EMWI: (list of supported <mode>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

Response *EMWI: <unsolicited>, <status>, (<count>)

Description: This command interrogates voice mail status. This AT command shall provide an indication of waiting messages and message count if available. An unsolicited result code shall be enabled/disabled to inform the host of a new message waiting. The host can read at power up. USIM file contents shall have priority over CPHS contents.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Disable unsolicited voice mail indication.

1 Enable unsolicited voice mail indication. Default value.

2 Query voice mail indication for all lines.

<unsolicited> Description

0 This is a solicited response.

Page 212: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 212 of 272

<unsolicited> Description

1 This is an unsolicited response.

<status> Description

0 The specific line has no voice mail waiting.

1 The specific line has voice mail waiting.

<count> Description

0-255

Integer type. Count of messages waiting, if available.

Example: Query command AT*EMWI=2 *EMWI: 0,1,1 OK

Page 213: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 213 of 272

16 SIM Commands

16.1 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access

Description Command Possible Responses

Transmit command

AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[, <P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>[,<pathid>]]]]

+CRSM: <sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CRSM=? OK

Description: By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM TE application has easier but more limited access to the SIM database. This command transmits to the MT the SIM <command> and its required parameters. MT handles internally all SIM-MT interface locking and file selection routines. As response to the command, MT sends the actual SIM information parameters and response data. MT error result code +CME ERROR may be returned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM, but failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2> parameters. The TE should be aware of the precedence of the GSM/UMTS application commands internal to the MT over the commands issued by the TE.

Additional Information: When accessing a SIM/USIM some <fileid> values are common between the different directory paths. In order to unambiguously specify which common <fileid> is intended the command *ECDF must first be used to select the active directory path to be used by +CRSM. Note that the *ECDF command effectively sets the active directory for all subsequent +CRSM use. Even if an EF can be uniquely identified by its <fileid> alone, if the correct directory has not been selected by *ECDF then the file will not be accessible.

Defined values: <command> Description (SIM commands defined in 3GPP 51.011)

176 READ BINARY

178 READ RECORD

192 GET RESPONSE

Page 214: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 214 of 272

<command> Description (SIM commands defined in 3GPP 51.011)

214 UPDATE BINARY

220 UPDATE RECORD

Other values

Reserved

NOTE 1: The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the desired file, before performing the actual command.

<fileid> Description

decimal integer

Identifier of a elementary datafile on SIM. Mandatory for every command except GET RESPONSE

The values are defined in 3GPP 51.011. NOTE 2: The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is defined in 3GPP 51.011. Optional files may not be present at all.

<p1>,<p2>,<p3> Description

integer Parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM. These parameters are mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE.

The values are defined in 3GPP 51.011

<data> Description

hexadecimal character data (refer to +CSCS)

Information which shall be written to the SIM

<pathid> Description

hexadecimal string type

The path of an elementary file on the SIM/UICC in hexadecimal format as defined in ETSI TS 102 221

<sw1>,<sw2> Description

integer Information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command. These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed execution of the command

Page 215: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 215 of 272

<response> Description

hexadecimal Response of a successful completion of the command previously issued

The GET RESPONSE command return data which gives information about the current elementary datafield. This information includes the type of file and its size (refer to 3GPP 51.011)

After the READ BINARY or READ RECORD command, the requested data will be returned

A <response> is not returned after a successful UPDATE BINARY or UPDATE RECORD command

Command Help The AT+CRSM description in the 27.007 spec only shows the general syntax, and refers the reader to other specs for specific SIM/USIM commands. Here are a few specific examples. READ BINARY: AT+CRSM=176,<fileid>,<OffsetHi>,<OffsetLo>,<Len> UPDATE BINARY: AT+CRSM=214,<fileid>,<OffsetHi>,<OffsetLo>,<Len>,"<data>" READ RECORD: AT+CRSM=178,<fileid>,<RecNum>,<mode>,<RecLen> UPDATE RECORD: AT+CRSM=220,<fileid>,<RecNum>,<mode>,<RecLen>,"<data>"

Parameters: <fileid> Must be entered in decimal <RecNum> Record number, starting at record 1. <mode> 2=Next record. <RecNum> must be 0. 3=Previous. <RecNum> must be 0. 4=Absolute. If <RecNum> = 0, then Current record. <Len> Length of file, in bytes. <RecLen> Length of record, in bytes. <data> Hex data, two hex digits per byte.

Examples: Read record 1 of linear fixed file 0x6F47 (28487). It has 30 bytes/record. AT+CRSM=178,28487,1,4,30 +CRSM: 144,0,"00FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF"

Read the next record. AT+CRSM=178,28487,0,2,30

Page 216: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 216 of 272

+CRSM: 144,0,"00FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF" Update record 1. AT+CRSM=220,28487,1,4,30,"111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111" +CRSM: 144,0 Read binary file 6F7E (28542). It has 11 bytes. AT+CRSM=176,28542,0,0,11 +CRSM: 144,0,"FFFFFFFF130130012D0001" Update binary file 6F7E. AT+CRSM=214,28542,0,0,11,"0123456789ABCDEF012345" +CRSM: 144,0

16.2 AT+CPIN PIN Control

Description Command Possible Responses

Request PIN Control AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CPIN? +CPIN: <code>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPIN=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME operational (SIM PIN or SIM PUK). If the PIN is to be entered twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is

Page 217: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 217 of 272

pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message (+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE. If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN, <newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM in the active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) or SIM card.

Note: Commands which interact with MT that are accepted when MT is pending SIM PIN or SIM PUK are: +CGMI, +CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, D112; (emergency call), +CPAS, +CFUN, +CPIN and +CIND (read and test command only).

Defined values: <pin>,<newpin> Description

string The range for the SIM PIN is 4 - 8 digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits.

PH-NET PIN, PH-NETSUB PIN, PH-SP PIN, PH-CORP PIN, PH-ESL PIN and PH-SIMLOCK PIN are 8-16 digits.

<code> Description

READY MT is not pending for any password

SIM PIN ME is waiting for UICC/SIM PIN to be given

SIM PUK ME is waiting for UICC/SIM PUK to be given

PH-SIM PIN

ME is waiting for ME_lock_code password to be given (PCK in 3GPP 22.022).

SIM PIN2 ME is waiting active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) or SIM card PIN2 to be given (this <code> is to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered right after the failure, the ME does not block its operation)

SIM PUK2 ME is waiting active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) or SIM card PUK2 to be given (this <code> is to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not entered right after the failure, the ME does not block its operation)

PH-NET PIN

ME is waiting network personalization password to be given (NCK in 3GPP 22.022).

PH-NETSUB PIN

ME is waiting network subset personalization password to be given (NSCK in 3GPP 22.022).

Page 218: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 218 of 272

<code> Description

PH-SP PIN ME is waiting service provider personalization password to be given (SPCK in 3GPP 22.022).

PH-CORP PIN

ME is waiting corporate personalization password to be given (CCK in 3GPP 22.022).

PH-ESL-PIN

Extended SIM-Lock. Ericsson specific

BLOCKED The SIM card is blocked for the user. Example:

AT+CPIN=“0000” OK

16.3 AT*EPEE Pin Event

Description Command Possible Responses

Enable/disable PIN1 code events

AT*EPEE=<onoff> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the current status for PIN1 Code Request

AT*EPEE? *EPEE: <onoff>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*EPEE=? *EPEE: (list of supported <onoff>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

The command requests the module to report when the PIN1 code has been entered and accepted.

<onoff> Description

0 Request for report on correctly entered PIN1 code is not activated (off). Default value

1 Request for report on correctly inserted PIN1 code is activated (on)

Page 219: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 219 of 272

16.3.1 *EPEV Pin Event Unsolicited report The *EPEV PIN Event code unsolicited response is issued when a pin code has been entered and accepted. The unsolicited reports are enabled using the AT*EPEE command (see above). The *EPEV unsolicited response has the following syntax (no parameters): *EPEV

16.4 AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number

Description Command Possible Responses

Request SIM Serial number AT*E2SSN <SSN>

Shows if the command is supported

AT*E2SSN=?

OK

ERROR Description:

This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field (address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE. This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.

Defined values: <SSN> Description

String without double quotes SIM serial number Examples:

AT*E2SSN 8944110063503224707 OK where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is 984411003605234207F7. Test command: AT*E2SSN=? OK

16.5 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification

Description Command Possible Responses

Read IMSI AT+CIMI <IMSI>

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CIMI=?

OK

ERROR Description:

Page 220: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 220 of 272

Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM attached to the ME.

Defined values: <IMSI> Description

string without double quotes

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Examples: AT+CIMI 234157411545420 OK

16.6 AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information

Description Command Possible Responses

Request PIN information

AT*EPIN? *EPIN:<chv1>,<unbl_chv1>, <chv2>,<unbl_chv2>

OK

ERROR

+CME ERROR <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT*EPIN=? OK

ERROR

Description: This command returns the number of remaining attempts of entering the correct PIN code for the SIM card in use. The command returns the number of remaining attempts for both PIN1 (CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (unblock CHV1) and PUK2 (unblock CHV2). The user has 3 attempts of entering the correct PIN. If unsuccessful the third time, the SIM will be Blocked. The attempts can occur in separate sessions. This command is available without SIM access. The setting is persistent through a power cycle.

Defined values: <chv1>,<cvh2> Description

0 No more attempts remain

1..3 Number of remaining attempts

Page 221: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 221 of 272

<unbl_chv1>,<unbl_cvh2> Description

0 No more attempts remain

1..10 Number of remaining attempts

16.7 AT+CEAP EAP Authentication

Description Syntax Possible responses

Exchange EAP packets

AT+CEAP=<dfname>, <EAPMethod>, <EAP_packet_data>[,<DFeap>]

+CEAP: <EAPsessionid>, <EAP_packet_resp>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT+CEAP=? OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command allows a TE to exchange EAP packets with the UICC or the ME. Prior to the execution of this command, the TE shall retrieve the available AIDs using the +CUAD command. The TE shall select one appropriate AID to be addressed. Selection may include asking the user, and considering EAP methods supported by the AIDs. The TE shall set the <dfname> value using the selected AID and shall set the <EAPMethod> value to the requested EAP method. The TE may set the <DFeap> value to the directory file identifier that is applicable to the <EAPMethod>; which is derived from the discretionary data returned by +CUAD. The parameter is mandatory for EAP terminated in UICC. If the targeted application on the UICC does support the requested EAP method, the MT shall use the value provided in <DFeap>, and it shall transmit the <EAP_packet_data> to the UICC application using the Authenticate APDU command as defined in ETSI TS 102 310. The appropriate DFEAP in the ADF must be selected prior to the submission of an EAP Authenticate command with the <EAP packet data>. Then the EAP Response data sent by the UICC

Page 222: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 222 of 272

application in its response to the Authenticate command shall be provided to the TE in <EAP_packet_resp>. If the targeted application on the UICC does not support the requested EAP method and if the MT does support this method then the <EAP packet data> shall be handled by the MT. During the handling of the EAP method, the MT shall run the authentication algorithm on the SIM or USIM, respectively. Also the MT has to allocate an <EAPsessionid> in order to identify an EAP session and its corresponding keys and parameters. If neither the MT nor the appropriate UICC application support the requested EAP method, the MT shall respond with CME ERROR: 49, (EAP method not supported).

Additional Information Note that this implementation supports only UICC handling of EAP methods.

Defined values:

<dfname> Description

Hexadecimal String type

all selectable applications represented in the UICC by an AID are referenced by a DF name coded on 1 to 16 bytes.

<EAPMethod> Description

Hexadecimal String type

this is the EAP Method Type as defined in RFC 3748 in 1 byte format or in 8 byte expanded format.

<EAP_packet_data> Description

Hexadecimal String type as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

<DFeap> Description

Hexadecimal String type

Contains the DF(EAP) associated with the specified <EAPMethod> on the SIM/UICC as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

<EAPsessionid> Description

Integer type this is the identifier of the EAP session to be used in order to retrieve the EAP parameters with the +CERP command. Value range is from 1 to 4294967295

Page 223: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 223 of 272

<EAP_packet_resp> Description

Hexadecimal String type as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

16.8 AT+CERP EAP Retrieve Parameters

Description Syntax Possible responses

Retreive EAP parameters

+CERP=<EAPsessionid>,<EAPparameter>

+CERP:<EAP_parameter_response>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting

Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT+CERP=? OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command allows a TE to retrieve EAP session parameters / derived keys after a run of the +CEAP command. If the EAP session is handled by the UICC then the MT shall return the content of the elementary file corresponding to the indicated <EAPparameter>. Those EFs are defined in ETSI TS 102 310. If the MT handles the EAP session then the MT shall return the corresponding parameter encoded as defined for EAP files, see ETSI TS 102 310. For example, the keys shall be retrieved in the TLV format described in ETSI TS 102 310. If neither the MT nor the appropriate UICC application can provide the requested information (e.g. because the requested EAP session ID does not exist), the MT will respond with CME ERROR: 50, (Incorrect parameters).

Additional Information Note that this implementation supports only UICC handling of EAP methods.

Defined values:

<EAPparameter> Description

01 Keys

02 Status

Page 224: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 224 of 272

<EAPparameter> Description

03 Identity

04 Pseudonym

<EAPsessionid> Description

Integer type this is the identifier of the EAP session to be used in order to retrieve the EAP parameters corresponding to an active EAP session with EAP Retreive Parameters +CERP command.

<EAP_parameter_response> Description

Hexadecimal string depends on the value of <EAPparameter>; format of the parameter response is as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

16.9 AT+CUAD UICC Application Discovery

Description Syntax Possible responses

Read the available UICC applications

+CUAD +CUAD: <response>

+CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting Not applicable

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT+CUAD=? OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command asks the MT to discover what applications are available for selection on the UICC. According to TS 102.221, the ME shall access and read the EFDIR file in the UICC and return the values that are stored in its records. Each record contains the AID and optionally application parameters of one of the applications available on the UICC.

Defined values:

<response> Description

Hexedecimal string the response is the content of the EFDIR

Page 225: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 225 of 272

17 SIM Application Toolkit

17.1 AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection

Description Command Possible responses

Do the menu selection AT*ESTKMENU=<item> +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ESTKMENU=? +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

User has selected a menu item set up by the SET UP MENU proactive command from the SIM/USIM.

Defined values: <item> Description

Integer type

The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP MENU command.

17.2 AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response

Description Syntax Possible Responses

Send the TERMINAL RESPONSE

AT*ESTKRES=<command>,<result>,[<result2>],[<text>],[<id>]

OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT*ESTKRES=? OK

ERROR

Description: This AT command provides the method for responding to the SIM/USIM Toolkit commands. The host will provide as much information that it knows. In some instances, the wireless

Page 226: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 226 of 272

modem device will have more detailed information and is expected to provide this in the TERMINAL RESPONSE sent to the SIM/USIM.

Defined values: <command> Description

0 DISPLAY TEXT

1 GET INKEY

2 GET INPUT

3 PLAY TONE

4 SELECT ITEM

5 SEND SS

6 SEND USSD

7 SET UP CALL

8 SET UP MENU

9 BLANK

10 REFRESH

11 SEND SHORT MESSAGE

12 OPEN CHANNEL

13 CLOSE CHANNEL

14 RECEIVE DATA

15 SEND DATA

<result> Description

decimal integer

value for <result> must be entered as a decimal integer as listed.

0 Command performed successfully

1 Command performed with partial comprehension

2 Command performed with missing information

3 REFRESH performed with additional EFs read

4 Command performed successfully but requested icon could not be displayed

5 Command performed but modified by call control by SIM

6 Command performed successfully, limited service

7 Command performed with modification

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

Page 227: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 227 of 272

<result> Description

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

19 Help information required by user

not supported

20 USSD transaction terminated by the user

32 Host currently unable to process command

33 Network currently unable to process command

34 User did not accept call set up request

35 User cleared down call before connection or network release

36 Action in contradiction with the current timer state

not supported

37 Interaction with call control by SIM, temporary problem

38 Launch browser generic error

not supported

48 Command beyond host’s capabilities

49 Command type not understood by host

50 Command data not understood by host

51 Command number not known by host

52 SS Return Error (error cause handled by wireless modem device

53 SMS RPERROR

54 Error, required values are missing

55 USSD Return Error (error cause provide by wireless modem device

56 Multiple card command error

not supported

57 Interaction with call control by SIM or MO SM control by SIM, permanent problem

58 Bearer independent Protocol error

<result2> Description

0 No specific cause can be given

Page 228: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 228 of 272

<result2> Description

1 Screen is busy

2 Host currently busy on call

3 Host currently busy on SS transaction

7 Not in speech call

8 Host currently busy on USSD transaction

<text> Description

String type 0-9,*,#,+

GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet (unpacked)

YES/NO

<id> Description

1-255 Identifier of menu item for the SELECT ITEM command Note: For <command>=7 (SET UP CALL), the <text> parameter is required as the number to call. Note: A call that is originated from a SIM proactive command has to be hung up using the command AT*estkres=7,16

17.3 AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings

Description Command Possible responses

Set the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to STK

AT*ESTKS=<on_off> +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT*ESTKS? *ESTKS: <on_off>

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ESTKS=? *ESTKS: list of supported <on_off>

Page 229: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 229 of 272

Description Command Possible responses

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands. Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code *ESTK. Setting chosen is stored internally so that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on. If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the messages below are not sent to the application. The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.

Defined values: <on_off> Description

0 Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK. Default value

1 Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK

17.4 SIM Toolkit Unsolicited Result Codes

17.4.1 *ESTKCALL Set Up Call

Command

Possible responses

AT*ESTKCALL=<mode>,[<alphaid>],<codetype>,<dest>,[<duration>,<capabilityconfig>,<CallSetupAlphaId>

Description: The host will handle the initiation of new calls by the SIM/USIM Toolkit.

Defined values: <mode> Description

0 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call

1 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call, with redial

2 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold

Page 230: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 230 of 272

<mode> Description

3 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold, with redial

4 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any)

5 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any), with redial

<alphaid> Description

String type

Corresponds to Alpha Identifier specified in 51.014 and 31.111

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<dest> Description

Destination address (called party number)

<duration> Description

integer type redial duration (milliseconds) Response The response to SET UP CALL is TERMINAL RESPONSE as follows AT*ETSTKRES=7,<result>,<dialstring>,<result2>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

33 Network currently unable to process command

Page 231: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 231 of 272

<result> Description

34 User did not accept call set-up request

35 User cleared down call before connection or network release

48 Command beyond Host capabilities

52 SS Return Error (Firmware to provide the error cause to SIM/USIM)

<dialstring> Description

string type 0-9,*,#,+

<result2> Description

2 Host currently busy on call

3 Host currently busy on SS Transaction

17.4.2 *ESTKCC Call Control Event From SIM/USIM Application Toolkit

Command Possible Responses

AT*ESTKCC: <resultMode>[,<errCode>, <oldType>[,<newType>]],<”alpha”>

When Call Control by SIM/USIM is activated in SIM/USIM Profile, the result of the STK Call Control will return as this unsolicited event.

<resultMode> Description

1 Allowed, no modification.

2 Allowed, modified (type or dial string).

3 Not allowed.

4 Call control failed.

<errCode> Description

0 Call not allowed.

1 SIM/USIM toolkit is busy, cannot setup call.

2 SIM/USIM error causes setup fail.

3 There is other ongoing call setup.

Page 232: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 232 of 272

<errCode> Description

4 Beyond ME capabilities.

5 Call control by SIM/USIM, modified.

6 Call control by SIM/USIM, not allowed, temporary.

7 Call control by SIM/USIM, not allowed, permanent.

<oldType>, <newType> Description

1 Voice Call.

2 SS.

3 USSD.

4 SMS.

<”alpha”> Description

String type

Alphanumeric representation of the alpha ID text that is displayed along with the STK CC result.

Note: When <resultMode> is not “Call Control failed”, the <errCode> field will not be present.

*ESTKCC: <resultMode>,<oldType>,<newType>,<”alpha”> When <resultMode> is “Call Control failed”, the <errCode> field will always be present and the <newType> field will not be present. *ESTKCC: <resultMode>,<errCode >,< oldType >,<”alpha”>

17.4.3 *ESTKDISP Display Text

Command Possible responses

Displays text of unsolicited result code

AT*ESTKDISP: <priority>,<clear>,<codetype><CR><LF><data>

Description: The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code *ESTKDISP. Command AT*ESTKDISP allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated. Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow GSM 11.14 standard

Page 233: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 233 of 272

Defined values: <priority> Description

0 Display normal priority text

1 Display high priority text

<clear> Description

0 Clear message after a delay (60s)

1 Wait for user to clear message

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<data> Description

string Text of message to be displayed. 240 characters maximum

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=0,<result>,[<result2>]

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Hang up call

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

<result2> Description

1 Screen busy

17.4.4 *ESTKGIN Get Input

Page 234: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 234 of 272

Command

Possible responses

AT*ESTKGIN: <input>,<codetype>,<echo>,<minl>,<maxl><CR><LF><data>

Description: The host will display this request for input from the SIM/USIM Toolkit application. Data entered by the user shall be returned to the wireless modem device.

Defined values: <input> Description

1 0-9, *, #, + only

2 Alphabet set

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<echo> Description

1 Echo user input on display

0 Hide user input

<minl> Description

0 No minimum length

1-255

Minimum length

<maxl> Description

255 No maximum length

0-254

Maximum length

<data> Description

String type

Text to be displayed

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

Page 235: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 235 of 272

<data> Description

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response:

AT*ESTKRES=2,<result>,,<text>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

<text> Description

String type

Single digit within this range: 0-9,*,# or +

GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet, unpacked

17.4.5 *ESTKKEY Get Inkey

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKKEY:<input>,<codetype><CR><LF><data>

Description: The host will display the text message provided in *ESTKKEY. The single character or digit shall be returned to the wireless modem device.

Defined values: <input> Description

0 YES/NO

1 0-9,*,#,+ only

2 Alphabet set

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

Page 236: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 236 of 272

<codetype> Description

1 UCS2 alphabet

<data> Description

String type

Text to be displayed

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=1,<result>,,<text>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

18 No response from user

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

<text> Description

String type

Single digit within this range: 0-9,*,# or +

A single character from GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet, unpacked

17.4.6 *ESTKITEM Select Item

Command

Possible responses

AT*ESTKITEM:<title>,<codetype>,<numitems><CR><LF><id1>,<text1>[<CR><LF><id2>,<text2><CR><LF>…<idn><texto>]

Description: The host will display a list of items and return the selected item to wireless modem device.

Defined values: <title> Description

String type Text describing menu

Page 237: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 237 of 272

<title> Description

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<numitems> Description

1-255 The number of menu items to display

<id> Description

1-255 The identifier of menu item

<text> Description

String type

Text of menu item

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=4,<result>,,,<id>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

<id> Description

1-255 Identifier of menu item

17.4.7 *ESTKRSH Refresh

Page 238: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 238 of 272

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKRSH: <refreshType>[<CR><LF><EF list>] Description:

The REFRESH command contains the refresh type and the list of EF files (separated by comma), if any. In the case the refresh type is not SIM/USIM RESET, EF list will be given and cached data in the firmware will be updated. The host will need to update any cached data and respond with Terminal Response to inform the SIM/USIM if the command is carried out successfully. If the response is not result=0 or 3, the same command will be send again. In the case the refresh type is SIM/USIM RESET, the host will need to response if the reset can be carried out (result=0) or currently unable to process the reset (result=20). If the response is result=0, the firmware will be reset, and the host will need to turn radio back on again. To save unsaved data, the host shall perform such task before responding back to the firmware using Terminal Response. If the response result=20, the firmware will resend the command again at a later time.

Defined values: <refresh type> Description

0 Initialization with full file change

1 File change

2 Initialization with file change

3 SIM/USIM Initialization

4 SIM/USIM Reset

<EF list>

Description

List of EF files that have changed corresponding to file definitions given in the standard.

0xFF No files have changed Response

The response to REFRESH is TERMINAL RESPONSE described as follows: AT*ESTKRES=10 ,<result>, [<result2>]

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

3 Refresh performed with additional EF files read

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

Page 239: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 239 of 272

<result2> Description

1 Screen busy

2 Host currently busy on call

17.4.8 *ESTKSMENU Set Up Menu

Command

Possible responses

AT*ESTKSMENU:<alphaid>,<codetype>,<itemcount><CR><LF><id1>,<text1>[,<CR><LF><id2>,<text2><CR><LF>,…<idn>,<texto>

Description: The SET UP MENU command is used to add SIM/USIM applications for selection to the host application menu system. The SET UP MENU command is also used to remove SIM/USIM applications from the menu system.

Defined values: <alphaid> Description

String type Text description of menu

“NULL” Indicates that the alphaid is not available

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<itemcount> Description

integer type

number of items

<id> Description

1-255 Item number of menu item

<text> Description

String type Text for menu item

Page 240: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 240 of 272

Response: AT*ESTKRES=8,<result>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

48 Command beyond host capabilities

17.4.9 *ESTKSMS Send Short Message

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKSMS: [<alphaid>],<alphabet>,<result> Description:

The wireless modem device will be responsible for sending the SIM/USIM Toolkit application SMS message. The result of sending the message shall be reported to the host. The host will display an info. Box indicating that an SMS message was sent. However, this will be received “after the fact”. If <alphaid> is not sent with the AT command, then the host will inform the user that an SMS had been sent with a generic display message. If the Alpha id is valid then it will be displayed. If the SEND SHORT MESSAGE command from the SIM/USIM contains an empty/NULL Alpha Identifier, then this AT command shall not be sent to the host.

Defined values: <alphaid> Description

Corresponds to Alpha Identifier specified in 51.014 and 31.111

<alphabet> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<result> Description

0 SMS sent successfully

1 SMS operation failed Response

AT*ESTKRES=11,0

Page 241: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 241 of 272

17.4.10 *ESTKSS Send SS

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKSS:<alphaid>,<codetype>,<SSstring> Description:

The host will support parsing the SSstring and initiating the SS procedures. When the alpha id is sent by the SIM/USIM toolkit application, it will be displayed while the host is processing the Supplementary Service procedure. If the alpha id indicates that it is empty, then no indication is given to the user that a supplementary service procedure is being processed. If no alpha id is provided, then the normal procedures for processing a supplementary service procedure shall be followed. The SS procedure will not be included in the Last Number Dialed list.

Defined values: <alpha_id> Description

String type

Text message to be displayed while processing Supplementary Service string

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

“NULL” Empty alpha identifier

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<SS_string> Description

String type

a supplementary service control procedure, coded as for EF_ADN

Response: AT*ESTKRES=5,<result>,<result2>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

Page 242: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 242 of 272

<result> Description

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

33 Network currently unable to process command

48 Command beyond Host capabilities

52 SS Return Error (firmware must provide the error cause

<result2> Description

3 Host currently busy on SS transaction

17.4.11 *ESTKTONE Play Tone

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKTONE: [<alphaid>],[<codetype>],<tone>,[<unit>,<duration>]

Description: AT*ESTKTONE is sent to the host to play a tone.

Defined values: <alpha_id> Description

String type

Text message to be displayed during tone

For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

“NULL” Indicates an empty alphaid

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<tone> Description

8 Ringing tone

10 General Beep

11 Positive acknowledgement

12 Negative acknowledgement

Maybe others

Page 243: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 243 of 272

<unit> Description

0 Minutes

1 Seconds

2 Tenths of seconds

<duration> Description

1-255 Value in <units> Response: AT*ESTKRES=3,<result>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

48 Command beyond host’s capabilities

17.4.12 *ESTKUSSD Send USSD

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKUSSD: [<alpha_id>],<codetype>,<USSDstring> Description:

The host shall support parsing the USSDstring and initiating the USSD procedures. When the alpha id is sent by the SIM/USIM toolkit application, it will be displayed while the host is processing the initial USSD procedure. If the alpha id indicates that it is empty, then no indication is given to the user that a USSD procedure is being processed. If no alpha_id is provided, then the normal procedures for processing a USSD procedure shall be followed. The USSD procedure will not be included in the Last Number Dialed list.

Defined values: <alpha_id> Description

String type Text message to be displayed

“NULL” Indicates an empty alphaid

Page 244: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 244 of 272

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet

<USSDstring> Description

String type USSD string, coded as for EF_ADN Response: AT*ESTKRES=6,<result>,<result2>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

17 Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested

18 No response from user

20 USSD transaction terminated by the user

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

33 Network currently unable to process command

48 Command beyond host’s capabilities

52 SS Return Error (wireless modem device must provide the error cause)

55 USSD Return Error (wireless modem device must provide the error cause

<result2> Description

3 Currently busy on SS transaction

8 Currently busy on USSD transaction

17.4.13 *ESTKSIMT Setup Idle Mode Text

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKSIMT: <text>, <codetype> Description:

Displays a text string to be used by the ME as standby mode text.

Defined values:

Page 245: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 245 of 272

<text> Description

String type Text to be displayed

“NULL” Indicates empty Idle Mode Text string

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet Response: The AT*ESTKRES terminal response for this command requires you to enter the code type that was sent in the unsolicited message as a parameter in the reply. AT*ESTKRES=16,<result>,<codetype>

<result> Description

0 Command performed successfully

16 Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

18 No response from user

32 Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

17.4.14 *ESTKDTMF Send DTMF tone

Command Possible responses

AT*ESTKDTMF [<alphaid>], [<DTMFstring>], [<codetype>] Description:

The DTMF Tones will be played in the earpiece. The host will display the text passed in the proactive command to the screen if present. There is no AT*ESTKRES reply message required for this command. The Terminal Response will be sent automatically when all the tones have been played.

Defined values: <alphaid> Description

String type Text message to be displayed during tone

“NULL” Indicates an empty alphaid

Page 246: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 246 of 272

<DTMFstring> Description

String type String representative of DTMF sequence to be played

<codetype> Description

0 SMS default alphabet

1 UCS2 alphabet Response:

Page 247: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 247 of 272

18 Supplementary Services

18.1 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

Description Command Possible Responses

Request connected line identification presentation

AT+COLP=[<n>] OK

ERROR

Show the current setting AT+COLP? +COLP: <n>,<m>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+COLP=? +COLP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP (Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or disables the presentation of the COLP at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network. Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Enable. Default value.

1 Disable

<m> Description

0 COLP not provisioned

1 COLP provisioned

2 unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)

Page 248: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 248 of 272

18.1.1 +COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation Unsolicited Response

Description: When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), COLP intermediate result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter responses in the following format: +COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]

18.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter

Description Command Possible Responses

Reset the ACM (Accumulated Call Meter) value on the SIM

AT+CACM=[<passwd>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current value AT+CACM? +CACM: <acm> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Tests if the command is supported

AT+CACM=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in SIM file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset the value. If setting fails an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. See “ +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”. Note: This command is only valid for line 1 irrespective of the *ELIN command settings. Read command returns the current value of ACM.

Defined values:

Page 249: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 249 of 272

<passwd> Description

String type SIM-PIN2

<acm> Description

String type Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm> under +CAOC

18.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum

Description Command Possible Responses

Set command sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax

AT+CAMM=[<acmmax> [,<passwd>]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the current value

AT+CAMM? +CAMM: <acmmax> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command if supported

AT+CAMM=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM (refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited (see also 3GPP 22.024). SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the value. If setting fails an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.

Defined values:

Page 250: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 250 of 272

<acmmax> Description

String type

Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax feature

<passwd> Description

String type SIM PIN2

18.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge

Description Command Possible Responses

Execute command

AT+CAOC[=<mode>] [+CAOC: <ccm>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CAOC? +CAOC: <mode>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CAOC=? [+CAOC: (list of supported <mode>s]

OK

ERROR Description:

Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME. The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same command. Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is supported.

Defined Values: <mode> Description

0 Query CCM value (default)

Page 251: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 251 of 272

<mode> Description

1 Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

2 Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

18.4.1 +CCCM Current Call Meter Unsolicited Response

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating the accumulated charge as computed by the MS, expressed in terms of Home units. AT+CAOC is used to activate or deactivate the reporting of CCM. +CCCM: <ccm> Defined values:

<ccm> Description

string type

Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value is in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax value in the SIM.

18.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table

Description Command Possible Responses

Set command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT

AT+CPUC=<currency>, <ppu>[,<passwd>]

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Shows the current values

AT+CPUC? +CPUC: <currency>,<ppu> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Shows if the command is supported

AT+CPUC=? OK

ERROR

Description:

Page 252: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 252 of 272

Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT. For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short Message Services section.

Defined values: <currency> Description

String Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g. SEK)

<ppu> Description

String type

price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g. “2.66”)

<passwd> Description

String type SIM PIN2

18.6 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions

Description Syntax Possible Responses

Request Calling forwarding number and conditions

AT+CCFC=<reason> ,<mode>[,<number >[,<type>[,<class> [,<subaddr>[,<satype>[,<time>]]]]]]

+CME ERROR <err>

when <mode>=2 and command successful: +CCFC: <status>,<class1>[,<number>, <type>[,<subaddr>[,<satype>[,<time>]]]][<CR><LF> +CCFC: <status>,<class2>[,<number>, <type>[,subaddr>[,<satype> [,<timer>]]]]

[…]]

OK

Page 253: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 253 of 272

Description Syntax Possible Responses

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CCFC=? + CCFC: (list of supported <reason>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for 'not active' case (<status>=0) is returned only if service is not active for any <class>.

Defined Values: <reason> Description

0 Unconditional

1 Mobile busy

2 No reply

3 Not reachable

4 All call forwarding (refer to 3GPP TS 22.030)

5 All conditional call forwarding (refer to 3GPP TS 22.030)

<mode> Description

0 Disable

1 Enable

2 Query status

3 Registration

4 Erasure

<number> Description

String type

String type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>

<type> Description

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national /

Page 254: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 254 of 272

<type> Description international unknown Default setting if ‘+’ is not in <sca>

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number Default setting if '+' is in <sca>

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255

Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

<status> Description

0 Not active

1 Active

18.7 AT+CCWA Call Waiting Notes:

* - Query operation requires SIM (<mode> = 2). ** - Mode and Class are not parameter settings (value <n> only). *** - Query operation is not available in CFUN mode 4 (<mode> = 2).

Description Command Possible Responses

Request call waiting

AT+CCWA=[<n> [,<mode> [,<class>]]]

when<mode>=2 and command successful: +CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR><LF> +CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]] +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CCWA? +CCWA: <n> +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s) +CME ERROR <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

Page 255: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 255 of 272

This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable when the network is interrogated. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable. Default value.

1 Enable

<mode> Description

0 Disable

1 Enable

2 Query status

<classx> Description

integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information. Default value = 7 (1+2+4)

1 Voice L1

2 Data

4 Fax

8 Short message service

16 Data circuit sync

32 Data circuit async

64 Dedicated packet access

128 Dedicated PAD access

<status> Description

0 Not active

1 Active

Page 256: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 256 of 272

<number> Description

String type String type ME number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>

<type> Description

Integer format

Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.7)

<err> Description

0 ME failure

3 Operation not allowed

4 Operation not supported

21 Invalid index

30 No network service

31 Network timeout

100 Unknown Example:

AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (0-1) OK AT+CCWA? +CCWA: 0 OK

18.7.1 +CCWA Unsolicited Result Code: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>

18.8 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Notes:

* - Query (AT+CLIP?) does not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Description Command Possible Responses

Set calling line identification

AT+CLIP=<n> +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Page 257: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 257 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

ERROR

Shows the current setting AT+CLIP? +CLIP: <n>,<m>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLIP=? +CLIP: (list of supported <n>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network. When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), the unsolicited response, +CLIP, is sent for every incoming call. Read command gives the status of <n> and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIP service according to GSM 02.81 (given in <m>). This command is abortable.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable. Default value.

1 Enable

<m> Description

0 CLIP not provisioned

1 CLIP provisioned

2 Unknown (e.g. no network) The data affected by this command is contained in the User Profile.

Page 258: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 258 of 272

18.8.1 +CLIP Calling Line Identification Unsolicited Response

The unsolicited response, enabled/disabled by AT+CLIP, reports the caller ID of any incoming call. Format: +CLIP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,[<alpha>] [,<CLI_validity>]]] When CLI is not available ( <CLI validity>=2), <number> shall be an empty string ("") and <type> value will not be significant. When CLI has been withheld by the originator, (<CLI validity>=1) and the CLIP is provisioned with the "override category" option (refer 3GPP TS 22.081 and 3GPP TS 23.081), <number> and <type> is provided. Otherwise, the module will return the same setting for <number> and <type> as if the CLI was not available.

<number> Description

String type

String type phone number of format specified by <type>

<type> Description

Integer format Type of address octet in integer (refer to GSM 04.08 sub-clause 10.5.4.7)

<subaddr> Description

String type

String type subaddress of format specified by <satype>

<satype> Description

Integer format Type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer TS 4.08 subclause 10.5.4.8)

<alpha> Description

String type

String type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set AT+CSCS

<CLI_validity> Description

0 CLI is valid

Page 259: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 259 of 272

<CLI_validity> Description

1 CLI has been withheld by originator

2 CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations of originating network

Example: AT+CLIP=1 OK RING +CLIP: “07747008670”,129,,,“Matt L”,0

18.9 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction Notes:

* - Query (AT+CLIR?) does not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Description Command Possible Responses

Request calling line identification restriction

AT+CLIR=[<n>] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting AT+CLIR? +CLIR: <n>,<m>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLIR=? +CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command refers to CLIR-service according to 3GPP TS 22.081 that allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when originating a call. Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a

Page 260: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 260 of 272

subscriber without provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according 3GPP TS 22.081. The setting shall be per logical channel. Set command directly writes to non-volatile memory so that the setting is preserved also after turning off/on the MS. The &F command will not affect the setting. Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls (given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. This command is not abortable.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service. Default value.

1 CLIR invocation

2 CLIR suppression

<m> Description

0 CLIR not provisioned

1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode

2 Unknown (e.g. no network)

3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted

4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

18.10 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification

Description Command Possible Responses

Presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE

AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+CSSN? +CSSN: <n>,<m>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Page 261: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 261 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSSN=? +CSSN: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <m>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE. When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI: <code1> [,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes presented in this manual or in V.25ter. When several different <code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result code. When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command “Calling line identification presentation +CLIP”) and when several different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code.

Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA. Default value.

1 Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA

<m> Description

0 Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA. Default value.

1 Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA

Page 262: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 262 of 272

<code1> Description

0 Unconditional call forwarding is active

1 Some of the conditional call forwarding are active

2 Call has been forwarded

3 Call is waiting

5 Outgoing calls are barred

6 Incoming calls are barred

7 CLIR suppression rejected

8 Call has been deflected

<code2> Description

0 This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)

2 Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)

3 Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)

4 Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)

5 Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS notification) (during a voice call)

6 Forward check SS message received (can be received whenever)

7 Call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in explicit call transfer operation (during a voice call)

8 Call has been connected with the other remote party in explicit call transfer operation (also number and subaddress parameters may be present) (during a voice call or MT call setup)

9 This is a deflected call (MT call setup)

18.10.1 +CSSI Supplementary Services Notification Description:

The +CSSI unsolicited message is enabled or disabled by the AT+CSSN command. Unsolicited response format: +CSSI: <code>[,<index>]

Defined values: <code> Description

0 Unconditional Call Forwarding is active

1 Some of the conditional call forwardings are active

Page 263: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 263 of 272

<code> Description

2 A call has been forwarded

3 A call is waiting

5 Outgoing calls are barred

6 Incoming calls are barred

7 CLIR suppression is rejected

16 This is a CUG call (CUG index indicated in <cindex>)

<cindex> Description

0...32767 CUG index

18.10.2 +CSSU Supplementary Services Notification Description:

The +CSSU unsolicited message is enabled or disabled by the AT+CSSN command. When enabled, the message is of the following form: +CSSU: <code>[,<cindex>]

Defined values: <code> Description

0 This is a forwarded call

2 A call has been put on hold (during voice call)

3 A call has been retrieved (during voice call)

4 A multi-party call has been entered (during voice call)

5 The call on hold has been released (during voice call) (this is not a SS notification)

6 Forward check SS messages

16 This is a CUG call (index specified by <cindex>) (MT call setup)

<cindex> Description

0...32767 CUG index

18.11 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Notes:

* - Only the <n> parameter. <str> is not a parameter setting. ** - Mobile initiated USSD will not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Page 264: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 264 of 272

Description Command Possible Responses

Request unstructured supplementary service data

AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

Show the current setting

AT+CUSD? +CUSD: <n>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CUSD=? +CUSD: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

ERROR Description:

This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) according to 3GPP TS 22.090. Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0 is taken. When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD: result code. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Some different scenarios are shown below: 1. An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code presentation. 2. An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code. 3. If the external application answers to the request with the command AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.

Page 265: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 265 of 272

3b. A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the external application.

The different alternatives are shown below. Network Mobile Equipment External application

1 Signal Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD

Result code presentation enabled, presented

2 Signal asking for reply

Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD

Result code presentation enabled, presented

3 Answer AT+CUSD

3b Sends AT+CUSD Defined values: <n> Description

0 Disable result code presentation in the TA. Default value.

1 Enable result code presentation in the TA

2 Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to the read command response (not supported)

<str> Description

string type String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated)

- if <dcs> indicates that 3GPP TS 23.038 7 bit default alphabet is used:

- if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of 3GPP TS 27.005 Annex A. - if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. character P (GSM 23) is presented as 17 (IRA 49 and 55))

- if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used:

ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

Page 266: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 266 of 272

<dcs> Description

Integer type

3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0)

Example:

AT+CUSD=1,“*34#” OK +CUSD:1,"id code" AT+CUSD=0,"7465338" OK Example: +CUSD:0,“Expensive incoming call” Example: AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#” OK +CUSD:0,“ALARM” Example: AT+CUSD=1,“*#100#” OK +CUSD: 0,“07787154042”

18.11.1 +CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Unsolicited Response

Description: Unsolicited response reporting changes in USSD status. Format: +CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] See AT+CUSD, for more details.

Defined values: <m> Description

0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further information needed after mobile initiated operation)

1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after mobile initiated operation)

2 USSD dialogue terminated (due to network supplementary service release request). This result code is not generated if the dialogue terminates with a result code where <m> is equal to zero (0).

3 Other I/O client has responded. This parameter value is not applicable to GM 12. This result code is received if the network initiates a USSD dialogue and some other I/O client responds. The client that responds first receives the dialogue. Clients that try to respond after this notification has been generated, will

Page 267: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 267 of 272

<m> Description get a result code ERROR.

4 operation not supported

5 network time out

<str> Description

String type String type USSD-string (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated)

If <dcs> indicates that 3GPP TS 23.038 7 bit default alphabet is used:

Further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after mobile initiated operation)

If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used:

ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

<dcs> Description

Integer type

3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0)

Page 268: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 268 of 272

19 Alternate Line Services

19.1 AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile

Description Command Possible Responses

Read the customer service profile from the SIM

AT*ECSP=<service group>

*ECSP: <service group>,<services>

+CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ECSP=? +CME ERROR: <err>

OK

ERROR Description:

This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP. The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8 services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.

Defined values: <service group> Description

Integer type

1-9, 192-255

The service group code of the service group to read

<services> Description

Integer type

0-255

Decimal representation of a Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service group Bit=0: unused or unavailable service Bit=1: available service

Page 269: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 269 of 272

20 Alphabetic Listing of AT Commands Provided below is an alphabetic list of all AT Commands by section and page number. Command or Unsolicited Response Section Page +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) 3.15 38 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) 3.17 42 Abortability 1.7 13 AT Attention Command 10.1 146 AT +CMMS More Messages to Send 14.10 198 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control 11.1 153 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response 11.2 153 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile 5.1 57 AT&W Store Configuration Profile 5.2 64 AT* List all Supported AT Commands 3.12 36 AT*E2CMGA Modify message attribute 14.17 211 AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode 12.1 160 AT*E2RESET Restart Module 4.2 55 AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number 16.4 223 AT*ECAM Call Monitoring 3.23 49 AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile 19.1 273 AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters 9.1 113 AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters 9.2 114 AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create 9.3 116 AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities 9.4 117 AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities 9.5 119 AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete 9.6 121 AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP 9.11 129 AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP 9.12 131 AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP 9.7 122 AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP 9.8 124 AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters 9.9 127 AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters 9.10 128 AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters 9.14 135 AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters 9.13 133 AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General 9.15 137

Page 270: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 270 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response Section Page Parameters AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table Parameters 9.19 143 AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters 9.17 139 AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters 9.18 141 AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters 9.16 138 AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication 15.2 215 AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control 8.17 110 AT*EPEE Pin Event 16.3 222 AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information 16.6 224 AT*ERINFO Network Capability 12.2 167 AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection 17.1 230 AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response 17.2 230 AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings 17.3 233 AT*EUPLINK Send Uplink Data 8.18 111 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter 18.2 253 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum 18.3 254 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge 18.4 255 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type 7.1 67 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions 18.6 257 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date 6.1 66 AT+CCWA Call Waiting 18.7 259 AT+CEAP EAP Authentication 16.7 225 AT+CEER Extended Error Report 3.10 33 AT+CERP EAP Retrieve Parameters 16.8 227 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality 4.1 54 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate 8.1 71 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach 8.3 72 AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class 8.4 73 AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify 8.2 72 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State 8.5 74 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context 8.6 76 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context 8.7 78 AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) 8.10 83 AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) 8.11 91 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) 8.12 95 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting 8.8 80 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification 10.2 146 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification 10.3 146 AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification 10.4 147 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address 8.9 82 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) 8.13 101 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) 8.14 102

Page 271: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 271 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response Section Page AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status 8.15 103 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 14.1 187 AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification 10.5 147 AT+CGTFT Traffic Flow Template 8.16 106 AT+CHUP Hang up Call 2.10 24 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification 16.5 223 AT+CIND Indicator Control 3.11 33 AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands 3.13 36 AT+CLCC List Current Calls 2.11 25 AT+CLCK Facility Lock 12.3 168 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification 18.8 262 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 18.9 264 AT+CMAR Master Reset 4.3 55 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error 3.14 37 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting 3.16 40 AT+CMGC Send Command 14.4 189 AT+CMGD Delete Message 14.7 193 AT+CMGF Message Format 14.2 187 AT+CMGL List Message 14.8 194 AT+CMGR Read Message 14.9 196 AT+CMGS Send Message 14.5 191 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory 14.3 188 AT+CMSS Send From Storage 14.6 192 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE 14.11 198 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number 12.4 171 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation 18.1 252 AT+COPN Read Operator Names 12.5 173 AT+COPS Operator Selection 12.6 174 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status 3.18 43 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read 13.1 181 AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select 13.2 183 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write 13.3 184 AT+CPIN PIN Control 16.2 220 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage 14.12 204 AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List 12.7 176 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table 18.5 256 AT+CPWD Change Password 3.19 45 AT+CR Service Reporting Control 3.20 46 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code 3.21 47 AT+CREG Network Registration 12.8 178 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings 14.18 212 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol 7.2 68 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access 16.1 217 AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings 14.19 212 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address 14.13 206 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type 15.1 214 AT+CSCS Select Character Set 14.14 207 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters 14.15 208

Page 272: Pc300 Md300 Gsg at Command r2a En

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 272 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response Section Page AT+CSMS Select Message Service 14.16 209 AT+CSQ Signal Strength 3.22 49 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification 18.10 265 AT+CUAD UICC Application Discovery 16.9 228 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data 18.11 269 AT+GCAP Capabilities 10.6 148 AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification 10.7 148 AT+GMM Request Model Identification 10.8 149 AT+GMR Revision Identification 10.9 149 AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format 11.4 155 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control 11.5 156 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate 11.6 157 ATA Answer Incoming Call 2.1 15 ATD Dial 2.2 15 ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service 2.4 20 ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service 2.3 19 ATE Command Echo 11.7 158 ATH Hang up 2.5 22 ATI Identification Information 10.10 150 ATO Return to Online Data Mode 2.6 22 ATP Select Pulse dialing 2.7 23 ATQ Result Code Suppression 11.8 159 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control 3.1 28 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control 3.9 32 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character 3.2 28 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character 3.3 29 ATS4 Response Formatting Character 3.4 30 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) 3.5 30 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control 3.6 31 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout 3.7 31 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control 3.8 32 ATT Select Tone Dialing 2.8 23 ATV DCE Response Format 11.3 154 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control 2.9 23 ATZ Restore Configuration Profile 5.3 65